JP2011062236A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving the degree of attentions to a game during a specific game state. <P>SOLUTION: An MPU 92 of a main controller 71 executes a winning/losing lottery based on an entry of a game ball into an upper operation port or a lower operation port provided in a game area, and shifts a game state to an opening/closing execution mode enabling an entry into a variable winning device provided in the game area when a prescribed lottery result is obtained in the winning/losing lottery. In this case, the variable winning device operates with a common mode from start timing in the opening/closing execution mode when the result of the winning/losing lottery becomes a special losing result and in the opening/closing execution mode when the result becomes a no clear indication branch corresponded high probability result. In the opening/closing execution mode, an interval of the common mode may be shortened based on a generation of the entry into the variable winning device during the operation with the common mode. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball has passed through an operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a big hit state is generated, The change display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won, a combination of specific patterns and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. With the transition to the specific gaming state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the gaming area is started, and a large amount of gaming balls are paid out.

  For example, in more detail about the variable pitching device of the pachinko machine shown in Patent Document 1, in a situation that is not in the specific gaming state, the gaming ball cannot enter or is in a closed state that is difficult to enter, and the specific gaming When the state is changed, the state is switched to the open state for a specific number of times.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-074175

  Here, in the pachinko machine disclosed in Patent Document 1, when the game state is the specific game state, the player's interest is easily concentrated on how much game balls can be acquired. However, in the case of the pachinko machine shown in Patent Document 1, since the player can predict to some extent the number of game balls that can be acquired under the specific game state, there is a concern that the game in the specific game state may become monotonous. The

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the degree of attention to a game in a specific gaming state.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention according to claim 1 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state;
A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the variable pitch control is performed, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect are set to be high and low,
As the execution mode of at least a part of the section in the predetermined specific gaming state, the variable entry control is performed by the low expectation mode, and the variable is performed over a predetermined specific reference number. A predetermined mode is set that ends when the ball entering control is executed and also ends when a predetermined reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable ball entry means,
The number of the specific reference numbers is set to be equal to or less than the number of the specific reference times.

The invention according to claim 7 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state;
A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the variable pitch control is performed, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
As the specific gaming state,
The game is configured to have a round game that is controlled so as to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number when the variable ball entry control is performed. A first specific gaming state that is terminated when the game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times;
When the variable pitch control is executed for a predetermined specific number of times, the process ends and when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitch means. A second specific gaming state that also ends,
Is set,
Further, as a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control means is in the open state. A high expectation aspect and a low expectation aspect are set so as to be relatively high and low,
The first specific game state and the second specific game state are advanced by the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the operation of the variable entry means indicates which specific game state is in progress. The low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify is set in the appearance of
The specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number.

The invention according to claim 8 is a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player,
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state;
A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the variable pitch control is performed, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
As the specific game state, a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which a low identification section in which the specific game state is indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means is set. Is set,
Further, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section of one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is characterized by comprising special control execution means for executing special control corresponding to making it easier for the player to recognize that there is a high possibility of not being in the other specific gaming state based on the occurrence of a ball To do.

  It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game during the specific game state.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating a variable prize apparatus. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for rounds performed with MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation determination process for opening-and-closing execution modes performed by MPU of a sound emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. (A) Explanatory drawing which shows data table of production A1, (b) Explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A2, (c) Explanatory drawing which shows the data table of production A3. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the content of each opening / closing execution mode. (A), (b) Timing chart for explaining the contents of the pattern A opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special loss result, (c) Contents of the pattern A opening / closing execution mode triggered by any jackpot result It is a timing chart for demonstrating. (A) Timing chart for explaining the contents of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B triggered by the low-accuracy big hit result B or the unspecified high-big hit result B, (b) A pattern triggered by the explicit high-precision big hit result B It is a timing chart for demonstrating the content of the opening-and-closing execution mode of B. It is the schematic for demonstrating the outline | summary of the electrical structure of the game hall in which many pachinko machines were installed. (A) Rear view of the pachinko machine showing the external terminal board and its periphery enlarged, (b) An explanatory view for explaining an external output buffer provided in the RAM of the main controller, (c) of the external terminal board It is a block diagram for demonstrating an electrical structure. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process at the time of the mode transition performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the external output setting process for a delay performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the management process performed in MPU of a hall computer. (A) Timing chart for explaining the execution timing of external output in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern D, (B) Explaining the execution timing of external output in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A shifted from the low frequency support mode. It is a timing chart. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the external output in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the fact that the explicit high probability winning result A is obtained. 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of external output in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B. (A) Front view showing the configuration of the game board in the second embodiment, (b) a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the first variable winning device, (c) a longitudinal section for explaining the second variable winning device. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st distribution table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 2nd distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for an operation port performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening process performed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the content of opening and closing execution mode.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is a rotation base end side and the right side is a rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24, and FIG. 4B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 24. FIG.

  The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 33, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, A main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 33 and when a ball enters the lower working port 34, the payout of three prize balls is executed. When it occurs, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a prize is entered into the variable winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both the operation holes 33, 34 is larger than the number of prize balls in the lower action opening 34 than the number of prize balls in the upper action opening 33. It may be different. Further, the number of winning balls related to the variable winning device 32 is not limited to a configuration that is larger than the number of other winning balls, and may be configured to be smaller than the number of winning balls related to the general winning opening 31, for example.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34, or the through gate 35 are entered. The entry of a game ball is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 33 is on the upper side. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 34a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the electric combination driving unit 34b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot be won in the lower operation port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is possible to win the lower operation port 34.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower working port 34 is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 34a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 34a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 34 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, the variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. . The open / close door 32b is connected to a variable winning drive unit 32c provided integrally as the variable winning device 32 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable winning drive unit 32c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery. By the way, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that is shifted to when a big win or a special loss occurs. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later.

  The variable winning device 32 has a first state in which a winning is not possible or a winning is difficult to occur, and a range in which the winning opening 32a is widened more easily than in the first state, or the first winning state 32a is made easier to win. It is good also as a structure by which 2 states are set.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 43 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 44, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying a symbol which is a kind of a symbol (or variable display or switching display), and a center frame 42 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 41. Has been. The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and a dot matrix display. It may be a vessel.

  In the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

  The display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a diagram individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5.

  When an effect for game times is performed on the display screen G based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for the game round ends, if it is a game round corresponding to the occurrence of the most advantageous jackpot result, which will be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same odd number is attached to any active line is formed. If the game times correspond to the occurrence of a predetermined low probability winning result to be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any one of the active lines is formed. Further, if the game times correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, which is different from these, a combination of predetermined symbols is formed, although it is not a combination of symbols with the same numerals. The contents of each game result will be described later.

  In addition, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33 and 34, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 start the variable display, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time.

  Further, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol columns, the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, a first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 42, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed when the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned on. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 45 and 46 is fulfill | performed by the display in the one part area | region of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG.

  An inner rail portion 48 and an outer rail portion 49 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 48 and the outer rail portion 49, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and is stored in a launch rail 52 extending toward the guide rail and an upper plate 61a described later. A ball feeder 53 that supplies game balls onto the launch rail 52 and a solenoid 54 that is an electric actuator that launches the game balls supplied onto the launch rail 52 toward the guide rail are provided. By operating a firing handle 55 provided on the front door frame 14, the solenoid 54 is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 56 so that almost the entire gaming area can be viewed from the front. The window part 56 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 57 is fitted therein. The window panel 57 is colorless and transparent formed of glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed colorless and transparent of synthetic resin, and the game area is visually recognized through the window panel 57 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. If possible, it may be colored and transparent.

  Around the window portion 56, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 58 is provided above the window part 56 as a part of various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 58, speaker units 59 for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state are provided.

  Below the window portion 56 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 61 and a lower bulging portion 62 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel. An upper plate 61 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 61, and a lower plate 62 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 62. The upper plate 61a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 51 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 62a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 61a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the rear surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24), a main control device 71 for controlling the main game, a sound and lamp display, and a display control device (not shown) are controlled. A voice light emission control device 72 is mounted.

  In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening | release to the board | substrate box 71a of the main control apparatus 71, or leaving the trace of the open | release. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box 71a are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer is bonded when peeled off A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off by being left is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise the board | substrate box 71a can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 71 and the sound emission controller 72. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 73 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 74 and a control device assembly unit 75 are attached to the back pack 73.

  The payout mechanism unit 74 includes a tank 76 in which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 77 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 76. The game balls paid out from the payout device 77 are discharged to the upper plate 61a or the lower plate 62a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 77. The payout mechanism 74 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for turning on and off the power supply, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 75 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 78 having a function of controlling the payout device 77 and various control devices and the like, and a game associated with the operation of the launch handle 55 by the player A power supply and launch control device 79 for controlling the launch of the ball. The payout control device 78 and the power supply / launch control device 79 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 78 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The back pack 73 is provided with an external terminal plate 81 in addition to the payout mechanism 74 and the control device assembly unit 75. The external terminal plate 81 is installed at the upper corner of the back pack unit 15 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and on the upper corner. The external terminal board 81 is a board for outputting a predetermined signal so that the management computer of the game hall recognizes the state of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the external terminal board 81 will be described later.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 71.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 78 provided in the main control device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power source and a launch control device 79 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 92 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Each of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e is provided with a one-to-one detection with respect to a winning-corresponding pitched portion such as a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34 and a through gate 35. A sensor is included, and the MPU 92 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. Further, the MPU 92 executes various lotteries based on winnings in the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34.

  A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 78, and a sound emission control device 72 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 78 based on a winning determination result for the winning-corresponding winning portion. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 72. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a variable prize driving unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable prize winning device 32, an electric combination driving unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display unit. 43 and the display part 44 for an accessory are connected. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened is clearly indicated, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is executed in the MPU 92.

  In addition, an external terminal board 81 is connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 sets information according to the progress of the game in the external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94. Then, according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d, signal output setting is performed on the external terminal board 81, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer HC of the game hall. The contents of such setting will be described later.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power source and launch control device 79, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

  The power source and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 91 and the payout control device 78 and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 79 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. The storage holding power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 71. The power supply and launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 72 includes a sound emission control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 102 controls driving of the various lamp units 45, 46, 58 and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the main control device 71 and transmits the command to the display control device 111.

  The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113 that is an element in which a program ROM 114 and a work RAM 115 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 116, a character ROM 117, and a video RAM 118 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 113 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 116 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 116).

  The program ROM 114 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 115 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 113, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 116 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 116 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 116 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 116 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 113, the video RAM 118, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 118 from the character ROM 117 at a predetermined timing and causes the symbol display device 41 to display it.

  The character ROM 117 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 117 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 118 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 118.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 92 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation type counter for determining display continuation time in main display unit 43 and symbol display device 41 CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired in the RAM 94 when a prize is awarded to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is stored in a holding ball storage area 94a provided as a storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 94a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The combination of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area 94c of the RAM 94 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the mode of support by the electric accessory 34a is different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in an open state per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the next time that the electric component opening lottery is performed after the first electric component opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode (that is, The one display continuation time in the accessory display 44 is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower working port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 35) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character releasing lottery is performed once. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 93a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the success / failure tables include a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 9 (a) and a high probability mode success / failure table (high) in FIG. 9 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9 (a), the value of the random number for winning the big hit is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 9B, the value of the random number for winning the big hit is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and the jackpot random number to be a big win in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the counter C1 may be configured to include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value which is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, the special result (small hit result) and the normal result are given as the result. Are set. Neither special failure result nor normal failure result will trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or support mode, but the special failure result will trigger the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, while the normal failure result will switch to the opening / closing execution mode. It will not be an opportunity for transition.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 93b as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the jackpot result is assigned to a low likelihood big hit result A (or sudden normal big hit result), a low likelihood big hit result B (or normal jump-up big hit result), a low likelihood big hit result C (or normal) Jackpot result), implicit high probability jackpot result A (or latent probability variation jackpot result), implicit high probability jackpot result B (or latent probability variation jump-up jackpot result), explicit high probability jackpot result A (or sudden probability variation jackpot result), An explicit high-probability jackpot result B (or first sudden jump-up jackpot result), an explicit high-probability jackpot result C (or second sudden jump-up jackpot result), and the most advantageous jackpot result are set. A jackpot type counter C2 is assigned to each jackpot result so as not to overlap each other.

  Each of these jackpot results has three types: (1) content related to the opening / closing execution mode, (2) content related to the success / failure lottery mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, and (3) content related to the support mode after completion of the opening / closing execution mode. At least one of the contents is different. Details thereof will be described later.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and the final stop result becomes the assignment corresponding result in a game round that is a predetermined jackpot result. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to be the assignment correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the display of the variable display of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state of In addition, about the assignment | correspondence corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  In the expected effect, two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the result of giving correspondence at a stage before the reach display occurs are set.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  In the notice display, in a situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol columns. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the aspect until then, and what makes the symbol on the symbol row | line | column Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also contained. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In addition, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result or the special loss result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed, the combination is not executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. Further, in the game times corresponding to the result of normal losing, the reach random number counter C3 obtained at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 93 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. If executed.

  On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is performed not by the main controller 71 but by the sound emission controller 72. In this case, in the sound emission control device 72, the game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results or the special loss results are more likely to generate a notice display than the game times corresponding to the normal loss results, and the appearance rate The lottery process for displaying the notice is executed so as to satisfy at least one of the conditions that a low notice display is likely to occur. Incidentally, the lottery result is reflected when the game display effect is executed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display continuation time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol display continuation time on the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation display is determined at the start of variation display in the main display unit 43 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41.

<About various processes executed by main controller 71>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 92 in the main controller 71 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 92 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 92 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. In the reading process, the states of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are read, the states of the various winning detection sensors 96a to 96e are determined, and the winning detection information is stored. Further, when a winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensors 96a to 96e corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a winning ball command for instructing the payout control device 78 to pay out the winning ball is set. To do. For example, when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is detected, a winning ball command for instructing 15 winning balls as a specific unit number is set. In the subsequent step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

  In subsequent step S104, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 35. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 94c is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 94c. Moreover, the process for making the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 light the 2nd reservation lamp | ramp part 46 corresponding to the number of articles | goods reservation memory | storage is performed.

  After that, in step S105 to step S108, a winning process for the operation port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S105, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. If no winning has occurred, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, in step S106, is the start hold storage number NA stored in the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 94a less than an upper limit (for example, “4”)? Determine whether or not. If the start pending storage number NA is the upper limit value, the timer interruption process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S107.

  In step S107, the start pending storage number NA is incremented by one. In the subsequent step S108, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 94a as holding information. In this case, the data is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number. Further, a process for lighting the first hold lamp unit 45 corresponding to the number of start hold memories is executed for the sound emission control device 72. After executing the process of step S108, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 78. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72. Further, the output setting for the external terminal board 81 is performed according to the information set in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94. Such processing will be described in detail later.

  In the subsequent step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game times control processing, determination of success / failure and distribution determination are performed, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S205, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electric role support process, the electric role release indicating whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 94c of the RAM 94. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 34a is executed. In addition, display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric character release lottery.

  Here, as already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 34a, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. Is called. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state is set larger than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. Also, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In a succeeding step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined launch period is set on condition that a launch permission signal output from the power source and launch control device 79 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the launch handle 55. The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 51 is excited once (for example, 0.6 sec). Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 94. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 95 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 95 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 92, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 207 that the power failure flag has been set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption process from step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the access to the RAM 94 is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S203 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processing after step S302, that is, the game turn start processing in steps S303 to S305 and the game turn progress processing in steps S306 to S310. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S302 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. When the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn starting process in steps S303 to S305. In the processing for starting game times, first, in step S303, the number-of-holds storage area NA of the hold-ball storage area 94a is referred to and the start-hold storage number NA, which is the number of hold information stored on hold, is “0”. Determine whether. The case where the start hold storage number NA is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 94a. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number NA is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S304.

  In the data setting process, first, the start pending storage number NA is decremented by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 94a is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

  This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the data setting process, a process for causing the sound emission control device 72 to recognize that the hold information has been shifted and changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold is executed. To do.

  After executing the data setting process, the game start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S305. Here, the variation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S401, a validity determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 93a, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 matches the high-probability jackpot numerical information, and if it does not match the jackpot numerical information, does it match the special outlier numerical information? Determine whether or not. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical value relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area 93a. It is determined whether or not the information matches the low probability jackpot numerical information. If the information does not match the jackpot numerical information, it is determined whether or not the information matches the special outlier numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S402, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S401 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a big win result, a distribution determination process is executed in step S403.

  In the distribution determination process, information for distribution determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 93b, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information relating to the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, low likelihood jackpot result A, low likelihood jackpot result B, low likelihood jackpot result C, non-explicit high jackpot result A, implicit high probability jackpot result B, explicit high likelihood jackpot result A, explicit high jackpot result It is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the result B, the explicit high probability jackpot result C, and the most advantageous jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S404, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 93 in advance, The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of patterns stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 are set differently for each jackpot result type. In step S404, the type of pattern is specified in step S403. Information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 94.

  Note that the information on the type of the picture to be stopped and displayed is determined according to the value of the type counter C2. In this case, the pattern mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each game result, and a plurality of types of pattern modes may be set for each game result.

  In the subsequent step S405, processing for setting a flag in the RAM 94 according to the type of jackpot result specified in step S403 is executed. Specifically, the low-accuracy A flag is set when the low-accuracy hit result A is specified, and the low-accuracy B flag is set when the low-accuracy hit result B is specified. The low probability C flag is set when it is specified that the likelihood winning result C is specified, and the implicit A flag is set when it is specified that the implicit high probability winning result A is specified. If the result B is specified, the implicit B flag is set. If the result is the explicit high likelihood hit result A, the explicit A flag is set, and the result is the explicit high probability hit result B. If an explicit B flag is set, an explicit C flag is set if it is specified to be an explicit high probability jackpot result C, and it is most advantageous if it is specified to be the most advantageous jackpot result. Set flags That. In the following description, whether or not the various jackpot results are determined is determined by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 94 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S402 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S406 whether or not the result of the determination process in step S401 is a special outage result. If the result is special, the process proceeds to step S407.

  In step S407, a stop result setting process for a special loss result is executed. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the special loss result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In a succeeding step S408, processing for setting a special out flag in the RAM 94 is executed.

  If it is determined in step S406 that the result is not a special loss result, a stop result setting process for a normal loss result is executed in step S409. Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the special loss result stored in the ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the special loss result.

  After executing any one of steps S405, S408, and S409, display continuation time (display continuation period) setting processing is executed in step S410.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 94 is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current fluctuation is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result C, it is determined that the reach display occurs. Further, even when neither the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C is present, it is not the other jackpot result or special outlier result, but further numerical information relating to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE. Is numerical information corresponding to reach occurrence, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93 and displayed. The duration information is set in a display duration counter provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. The display duration information is set in the display duration counter. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach occurs is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number of the start pending storage numbers NA is larger. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the display duration time does not vary according to the start pending storage number NA and the support mode may be used, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, special out-of-order results, out-of-reach cases, and non-reach normal out-of-reach results, a display duration table may be set individually. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  After executing the display continuation time setting process in step S410, a change command and a type command are set in step S411. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on whether or not reach has occurred is not included in the command for use, the audio light emission control device 72 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the display duration time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, in the type command, as the information of the game result, the information of the low probability big hit result A, the information of the low likelihood big hit result B, the information of the low likelihood big hit result C, the information of the implicit high probability big hit result A, the hidden high Information on the jackpot result B, information on the explicit jackpot result A, information on the explicit jackpot result B, information on the explicit jackpot result C, information on the most favorable jackpot result, information on the special missed result, and normal miss Contains result information.

  The variation command and type command set in step S411 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving these commands will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S411, the main display unit 43 starts to display the variation of the picture in step S412. Thereafter, in step S413, after executing the external output canceling process, the fluctuation starting process is terminated. The contents of the external output cancellation process will be described later in detail.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S306 to S310 is executed.

  In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the display duration time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the display duration information stored in the display duration counter of the RAM 94 is “0”. As described above, the display duration information value is set in the display duration setting process (step S410). Further, the value of the set display duration information is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

  If the display continuation time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S307. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display unit 43 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the display continuation time has elapsed, a change end process is executed in step S308. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 94 is specified in any one of steps S404, S407, and S409 of the change start process (FIG. 14) executed when starting the currently executed game round. The main display unit 43 is controlled so that the pattern mode corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43.

  Here, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is different for each game result. Thereby, the manager of the game hall or the like can visually check the game result of the game round by visually checking the main display unit 43 at the end of the game round. For example, the pachinko machine 10 exhibits the same behavior as the jackpot result. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act to be performed is performed. On the other hand, the display range of the main display unit 43 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Further, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is compared at least with various jackpot results and special loss results. In this case, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, the player is expected to check the game result of the game times not from the main display unit 43 but from the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

  In the subsequent step S309, a change end command is set. The change end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 72 executes a process for ending the effect in the game times based on the reception of the change end command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently in the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 or the display control apparatus 111, without transmitting a change end command.

  Thereafter, in step S310, after executing the external output setting process for the number of games, this game number control process is terminated. The contents of the external output setting process for the number of games will be described later in detail.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S503 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result or special out-of-game result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S504 whether or not the current game result is a special outage result. If the result is a special loss result, in step S505, the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 is used to terminate the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result. “2” is set as the upper limit number which is a sufficient condition. In step S506, “15” is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. The open / close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of times to open and close the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32.

  On the other hand, if the result is not a special loss result, that is, if it is any jackpot result, “15” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S507. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode.

  That is, in this pachinko machine 10, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit, and a round game is not set, and the opening / closing frequency of the variable winning device 32 is an upper limit. There is set an open / close number regulation mode that is terminated when either one of the number of times and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls to win the big prize opening 32a is satisfied.

  The round number regulation mode shifts based on any jackpot result. Here, the round game is one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize winning opening 32a. A game that continues until is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in round games, either the number of opening / closing of the variable prize-winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the big prize opening 32a. The game may be continued until one of the conditions is satisfied.

  The number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  On the other hand, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing number regulation mode on the basis of a special outage result. In the open / close number regulation mode, as described above, one of the conditions that the open / close count of the variable prize-winning device 32 becomes the upper limit count and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening 32a is set. Exit based on being satisfied. In this case, the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number. In addition, after the upper limit number is set when the open / close number regulation mode is started, the new upper limit number is not set in the open / close number regulation mode. Therefore, for example, when one game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 32a every time the big prize opening 32a is opened, the end condition related to the upper limit number is more than the end condition related to the upper limit number of times. Even if it is established first and the opening / closing of the upper limit number of large winning openings 32a has not been completed, the opening / closing number regulation mode ends.

  Note that the opening / closing number regulation mode is based on the fact that either a predetermined upper limit duration elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins the big winning opening 32a. It is good also as an aspect to complete | finish. However, even if it is this mode, the number of times of opening and closing the variable winning device 32 is substantially the upper limit number in relation to the upper limit duration.

  After executing the processing in step S507, round setting processing is executed in step S508. The setting process for the round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, "9" is set to the winning counter PC of the RAM 94 as the upper limit number, which is one sufficient condition for ending the round game. This number is larger than the upper limit number of open / closed number regulation modes that shift when triggered by a special outlier result. In other words, the upper limit number that is one sufficient condition for ending the open / close number regulation mode is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number that is one sufficient condition for ending the round game.

  The setting process for a round is a process that is started at a timing earlier than that when a new round game is started in the round number regulation mode. When the start is performed, the process of step S601 is performed. Processing is executed. Accordingly, in a configuration in which a plurality of round games are executed within the range of one round number regulation mode, the upper limit number is set individually for each round game. In the round number regulation mode, when the round game is not executed for the upper limit number of times, when the round game is finished, the next round game is newly started. In other words, in the round number regulation mode, even if a maximum number of game balls are won in the big prize opening 32a during one round game or one open, the number of round games executed reaches the upper limit number. If not, the open / close execution mode is continued.

  On the other hand, in the open / close number regulation mode, as described above, after the upper limit number is set when the open / close number regulation mode is started, the upper limit number is newly set in the open / close number regulation mode. Absent. Accordingly, when a maximum number of game balls have been won for the big winning opening 32a during one opening, or the total number of winning game balls that have occurred until a plurality of times the opening has been completed is the upper limit. When the number has been reached, the open / close number regulation mode is ended even when the upper limit number of large winning openings 32a has not been opened and closed.

  After executing the process of step S601, in step S602, it is determined whether or not this time is a process for specifying the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 in the 1R round number regulation mode. Since this is a setting process for rounds started at the start of the round number regulation mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S603.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the current round number regulation mode is the explicit high probability winning result C. If the result is the explicit high probability winning result C, in step S604, “19” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If it is not the explicit high probability winning result C, it is determined in step S605 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is the explicit high probability winning result B. If the result is the explicit high probability winning result B, in step S606, “15” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If it is not the explicit high probability winning result B, it is determined in step S607 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition is the low likelihood winning result B or the non-explicit high probability winning result B. If it is any jackpot result, in step S608, “8” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If it is not any of the jackpot results, in step S609, “1” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the number of open / close operations of the variable winning device 32 set in the 1R is different, although it is not one-to-one depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Note that the processing after step S610 will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), after executing the process of step S506 or step S508, the standby time for opening the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S509. “2000” is set as (standby period). The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 4 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for the opening is set in step S509 regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger. Therefore, the waiting time for opening in the opening / closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of game result that has been triggered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player, such as the most advantageous jackpot result. When some game results become an opportunity, it is good also as a structure greatly different from the case where another game result becomes an opportunity.

  After executing the processing in step S509, an opening command is set in step S510. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode. The opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving the opening command will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S511, after executing the external output setting process at the time of mode transition, the gaming state transition process is terminated. The contents of the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described in detail later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S501 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S512. In step S512, a delay external output setting process is executed. The contents of the external output setting process for delay will be described in detail later. In subsequent step S513, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is open. If the big prize opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S702 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”, and in step S703, whether the value of the timer counter T is “0”. Determine whether or not.

  Incidentally, when the open / close execution mode is being executed (step S501: YES), the special winning opening 32a is being closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” (step S702: YES). ) Means that it is during the waiting time for ending. Further, the open / close execution mode is in progress (step S501: YES), the special winning opening 32a is closed (step S701: NO), and the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” (step S702: NO). Further, when the value of the timer counter T is not “0” (step S703: NO), it is during the waiting time for the opening or the waiting time from when the special winning opening 32a is closed until it is opened again. Means that.

  When the value of the opening / closing counter SOC is “0” or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is. When the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the big prize opening opening / closing process is executed after executing the big prize opening opening process in step S704. finish.

  The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently being executed is one of the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result. It is determined whether it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, “30” is set to the timer counter T in step S802. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started as described above, the release time set in step S802 is It is 60 msec.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, the situation in which the current big prize opening release process is activated in step S803 is that the game result triggered by the above is the low-probability big hit result B and the 1st- The game result that corresponds to the 2R eye or the above-mentioned opportunity is the non-explicit high-precision jackpot result B and the game result that corresponds to the 1R to 2R eyes or the above-mentioned trigger is the explicit high-precision jackpot result Whether it is B and corresponds to the 1st to 2R or the game result that is the above-mentioned opportunity is the explicit high probability hit result C and the 1R, and does not correspond to the final opening / closing timing , Is determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, "30" is set to the timer counter T in step S802. If a negative determination is made in step S803, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated corresponds to the situation in which the game result that is the above-mentioned trigger is the explicit high-accuracy big hit result C and the first opening and closing timing. Judge whether it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S804, "10000" is set to the timer counter T in step S805. If a negative determination is made in step S804, “14500” is set in the timer counter T in step S806. Since the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started as described above, the release time set in step S805 is 20 sec. And the opening time set in step S806 is 29 sec.

  After executing the process of step S802, step S805 or step S806, the release execution process is executed in step S807. In the opening execution process, the variable winning driving unit 32c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 32a is in an open state.

  In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, one opening mode of the variable winning device 32 is set in a plurality of types with different opening continuation times (opening continuation periods) from when the big winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Has been. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) set to 29 sec, which is the longest duration, and a medium-time mode (20 sec, which is an intermediate time shorter than the longest time), Medium period mode) and a short time mode (short period mode) set to 0.06 sec which is the shortest time shorter than the intermediate time.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the launch handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Be controlled. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine, and the upper limit number of end conditions is also set to two in the open / close number regulation mode. Then, in the long time mode and the middle time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the open / close number regulation mode is set. Will be. On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the open / closed number regulation mode, more specifically, a time shorter than the launch period of the game ball is released. The duration is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in the long-time mode or the medium-time mode, the maximum number in the single round game or the open / closed number regulation mode with respect to the large winning opening 32a. When a winning is expected and the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode, there is one even if no winning occurs in the big winning opening 32a or a winning occurs. It is expected to be about.

  Also, depending on the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition and the progress status of the opening / closing execution mode, the opening mode set for one opening of the variable winning device 32 is different, although it is not 1: 1. ing.

  After executing the process of step S807, it is determined in step S808 whether or not the current opening of the special winning opening 32a is related to a new start of the round game in the round number regulation mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S808, after setting a round start command in step S809, the main prize winning opening process is terminated, and if a negative determination is made in step S808, the main prize winning is performed as it is. The mouth opening process is terminated. The round start command set in step S809 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that a round game has been newly started. The

  Returning to the description of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 17), if it is determined in step S701 that the special winning opening 32a is open, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the opening continuation time has elapsed for the current opening of the big prize opening 32a by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize winning opening 32a. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S707. In a succeeding step S708, it is determined whether or not this time is the 1R round of the round number regulation mode and the opening state of the variable winning device 32 is a short time state. If this is the case, a premium command is set in step S709. Here, the set premium command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving the premium command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S708 or after the processing in step S709 is executed, it is determined in step S710 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S711. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is finished so that the currently-open big winning opening 32a is closed.

  In a succeeding step S712, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If the result is not a special loss result, a round end command is set in step S713. The round end command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that the round game has ended.

  In subsequent step S714, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and then in step S715, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, a round setting process is executed in step S716. The round setting process will be described again with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the setting process for the round, as described above, first, in step S601, “9” is set in the winning counter PC, and in subsequent step S602, the variable winning device 32 in the first round of the round number regulation mode is set this time. It is determined whether or not the process is for specifying the number of times of opening and closing. Since this is a setting process for a round started in the middle of the round number regulation mode, a negative determination is made in step S602, and the process proceeds to step S610.

  In step S610, it is determined whether or not this time is a process for specifying the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 in the second round of the round number regulation mode. If it falls under 2R, whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the current round number regulation mode is the low-probability winning result B or the unspecified high-probable winning result B in step S611. Determine whether. If it is one of these jackpot results, in step S612, “8” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated. If none of the above jackpot results, in step S613, “1” is set in the open / close counter SOC, and then this setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S610 that the current time does not correspond to the 2R, this setting process ends after setting “1” to the open / close counter SOC in step S614.

  That is, the number of open / close operations of the variable winning device 32 set in the 2R is different, although it is not one-to-one depending on the type of the jackpot result that triggered the transition. On the other hand, regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition, the number of open / close operations of the variable prize-winning device 32 set after the third round is common to one.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 17), after executing the setting process for round in step S716, after setting “750” to the timer counter T in step S717, The process ends. The numerical information set in this case is numerical information for the round start waiting time between successive round games, and 1.5 seconds is set in the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the numerical information for the round start waiting time is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the round number regulation mode and regardless of the progress of the round number regulation mode.

  If it is determined in step S715 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S718. In step S718, an ending command is set. The ending command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  In the subsequent step S719, "3000" is set in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). Thereafter, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 6 sec, which is longer than the waiting time for opening. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, regardless of the type of game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for ending is set in step S719. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is the same in any type of opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for ending is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player, for example, the most advantageous jackpot result When some game results become an opportunity, it is good also as a structure greatly different from the case where another game result becomes an opportunity.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S712, that is, if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently being executed is a special outage result, the process proceeds to step S720. In step S720, it is determined whether the open / close counter SOC is “1”. That is, it is determined whether or not the number of winning game balls has reached the upper limit number in the final opening of the big winning opening 32a in the open / close number regulation mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S720, the process proceeds to step S718. The processing after step S718 is as already described.

  If a negative determination is made in step S720, that is, if the current opening time is not the last opening time in the opening / closing number regulation mode, the process proceeds to step S721 and a teaching command is set. The teaching command is such that, in the open / close number regulation mode triggered by a special outage result, the number of game balls won for the big winning opening 32a is set to the upper limit before the upper winning number of the big winning opening 32a is opened. This is a command transmitted in order to make the sound emission control device 72 recognize that it has been reached. The teaching command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound light emission control device 72 recognizes that the above condition is satisfied. Specific processing contents in the sound emission control device 72 when such a command is received will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S721, the process proceeds to step S719. The processing after step S719 is as already described.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S722. In step S722, a closing execution process is executed. The contents of the closing execution process are the same as in step S711.

  In subsequent step S723, the numerical information of the open / close counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted, and in step S724, it is determined whether or not the open / close counter SOC is “0”. If the open / close counter SOC is not “0”, “750” is set in the timer counter T in step S717, and then the big prize opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  The numerical information set in step S717 in the above processing flow is numerical information for the waiting time until the variable winning device 32 is changed from the open state to the closed state and then to the open state again. In the machine 10, 1.5 sec is set. In this case, the numerical information for the opening standby time is the same regardless of the type of game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, the numerical information for the opening waiting time is the same as the numerical information for the round start waiting time between successive round games. Thereby, it becomes possible to always make the opening waiting time constant when the variable winning device 32 is continuously opened and closed.

  If it is determined in step S724 that the open / close counter SOC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S725. In step S725, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a special outage result.

  If the game result that is the trigger is not a special outage result, that is, if the game result that is the trigger is any jackpot result, a round end command is set in step S726. The processing when the round end command is set is the same as that in step S713.

  Thereafter, in step S727, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted. In a succeeding step S728, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S716. The processing after step S716 is as already described.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S725 or an affirmative determination is made in step S728, the process proceeds to step S718. The processing after step S718 is as already described.

  The game state transition process including the big prize opening / closing process proceeds as in steps S501 to S513, so that the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the game result triggered by the transition is executed. In this case, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by one of the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result, the open / close pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same. (Hereinafter also referred to as pattern A opening / closing execution mode).

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any of the low probability winning result B, the non-explicit high probability winning result B, and the explicit high probability winning result B, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter referred to as a pattern). Also referred to as B open / close execution mode). In this case, as compared with the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B has a longer time for the opening / closing execution mode to continue, and the number of opening / closing operations of the variable winning device 32 is also increased.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high probability winning result C, the variable winning device 32 is controlled with an opening / closing pattern different from both the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B (hereinafter, referred to as “open / close execution mode”). Also referred to as pattern C open / close execution mode). Further, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is substantially the same (hereinafter also referred to as pattern D opening / closing execution mode). In this case, the variable prize-winning device 32 is controlled in an opening / closing pattern different from any of the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D.

  Here, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, and the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, there is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from the start timing to the midway timing. Then, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is ended as the common section is digested. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B and the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, it continues even after the common section is digested. In this case, the continuation mode is different between the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. This makes it possible for the player to predict which opening / closing execution mode is to be performed at the start of the opening / closing execution mode while diversifying the opening / closing execution modes. Details of this action and effect will be described later.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15), after the special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S513, the process proceeds to step S514. In step S514, it is determined whether both the round counter RC and the open / close counter SOC are “0”. If either one is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If both are “0”, it is determined in step S515 whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the timer counter T is “0”, the external output release processing in the support mode is executed in step S516. The contents of the external output cancellation process will be described later. Then, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S517, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous big hit result or any explicit high probability big hit result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, the flag is set if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94 in step S902, and the state is maintained if it is already set. . As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S903, when the number limit flag is set in the RAM 94, the number limit flag is cleared. When the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94 and the number limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes one of the jackpot results. The

  In the subsequent step S904, when the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and when the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes any one of the jackpot results. Thereafter, in step S905, after executing the external output setting process in the support mode, the shift process is terminated. The external output setting process in this support mode will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S901, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is any of the non-explicit high-precision winning results. To do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S907 whether the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

  If the high-frequency support flag is set, the migration process is terminated after the processes of steps S903 to S905 already described are executed. If the high frequency support flag is not set, in step S908, if the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. To do. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. Further, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes any one of the jackpot results. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S906, it is determined in step S909 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is any of the low probability winning results. . If a negative determination is made in step S909, the migration process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, the high probability mode flag is cleared in step S910 if the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 94. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the most advantageous result or any highly accurate result.

  In a succeeding step S911, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the low probability winning result C. In the case of the low probability winning result C, in step S912, if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set. If the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S913, “100” is set in the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. In the subsequent step S914, if the number limit flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times that is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are consumed, both the high frequency support flag and the frequency limit flag are cleared. Switch to the low frequency support mode. Incidentally, although the detailed description is omitted, this processing is executed in the power combination support processing in step S205 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Then, after executing the external output setting process in the support mode in step S915, the transition process is terminated. The external output setting process in the support mode will be described later.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S911, that is, if the low likelihood winning result A or the low likelihood winning result B is, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. To do. If a negative determination is made in step S916, the present transition process is terminated as is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, the process proceeds from step S913 to step S915, and then the present transition process is terminated. At the end of the transition process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 94 is cleared.

  As described above, when the game result of the game round becomes the most advantageous jackpot result or any of the explicit high probability jackpot results, the opening / closing execution mode (i.e., regardless of the state at the time of the game round) After completion of the round number regulation mode), the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, when the game result of a game round becomes any of the non-explicit high probability winning results, if the state at the time of the game round is the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode (that is, After the end of the (round number regulation mode), the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes a jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  On the other hand, when the game time is in the low frequency support mode, the game that is in the high probability mode and in the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Transition to the state. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  Further, when the game result of the game round becomes the low probability hit result C, the low after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) is ended regardless of the state at the time of the game round. The game state is switched to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result, and the high frequency support mode has digested 100 game times without the game result of the game times being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode. Incidentally, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the low probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  In addition, when the game result of the game times is the low probability big hit result A or the low probability big hit result B, when the state at the time of the game round is the high frequency support mode, the opening / closing execution mode After the end of (that is, the round number regulation mode), the game state is shifted to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game time becomes the next jackpot result, and the high frequency support mode has digested 100 game times without the game result of the game time being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode.

  On the other hand, when the game time is in the low frequency support mode, the game that is in the low probability mode and in the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Transition to the state. The low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result.

  By the way, when the low probability hit result A or the low probability hit result B is obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the low probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In addition, a gaming state that is not the opening / closing execution mode and is in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode corresponds to the normal gaming state.

  In addition, when the game result of the game times includes any special result, including the special result, the transition between the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

<About the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 72>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 102 in the sound emission control device 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect determination process is periodically activated by the MPU 102 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command are received. If these commands are received, it is determined in step S1002 whether or not the mode lottery condition is satisfied.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of effect modes are set so that the effect contents selected in the effect for game times are different. Specifically, an effect mode with a low expectation level, an effect mode with a medium expectation level, an effect mode with a high expectation level, and an effect mode with a high probability are set. The low expectation mode, the medium expectation mode, and the high expectation mode may be selected regardless of whether the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode. Mode. However, the selection rates are different from each other, and in the case of the low probability mode, the selection rate is set such that the production mode with the low expectation level> the production mode with the medium expectation level> the production mode with the high expectation level. In addition, in the case of the high probability mode, the selection rate is set such that the production mode with the low expectation level <the production mode with the medium expectation level <the production mode with the high expectation level. The high-definition production mode is not selected when the low-probability mode is selected, but is selected when the high-probability mode is selected.

  In each effect mode, the types of symbols variably displayed on each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the effect for game times are the same, but the background image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 and the expected effect are displayed. The type of character displayed on the display screen G at the time of execution and the content of the effect selected in the super reach display with high expectation for the jackpot result among the reach displays are set to be different. Moreover, since the sound effect according to the content of the display effect in the display screen G is output from the speaker part 59, it can be said that the sound output mode is different between the effect modes. However, the mode of difference between the production modes is not limited to the above, and at least one of the background image, the character type, the content of the production to be selected, and the sound output mode from the speaker unit 59 is provided. You may make it differ, You may make it make production contents other than that differ.

  In addition, the mode lottery condition is established when a lottery for generating a transition to the effect mode is won in a situation where an effect mode other than the highly reliable effect mode is set. The transition occurrence lottery is a transition occurrence winning when a loop counter periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used and the counter value acquired at the timing of step S1002 corresponds to the transition occurrence winning.

  If it is determined in step S1002 that the mode lottery condition is satisfied, an effect mode lottery process is executed in step S1003. In the effect mode lottery process, a loop counter that is periodically updated in the RAM 104 is used, and the numerical information of the loop counter corresponds to the numerical range corresponding to the low expectation effect mode and the medium expectation effect mode. An effect lottery table assigned to either the numerical value range or the numerical value range corresponding to the high expectation effect mode is used. In this case, the effect lottery table is set in correspondence with each of the case where the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the case where the lottery mode is the high probability mode. The selection rates of the medium-expectation effect mode and the high-expectation effect mode are set to satisfy the above relationship. However, each effect lottery table does not include a highly accurate effect mode, and the highly accurate effect mode is not subject to lottery in the effect mode lottery process.

  In addition, although detailed description by illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the information which shows which mode is a lottery mode is transmitted from the main control apparatus 71 to the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 as a command. Then, it is possible to grasp the current lottery mode.

  In step S1003, an effect lottery table corresponding to the current winning / failing lottery mode is read from the ROM 103, and numerical information for lottery is read from the loop counter of the RAM 104, and the two are collated. In step S1004, the effect mode corresponding to the collation result in step S1003 is set as the transition destination effect mode. The RAM 104 is provided with an effect mode counter in which the counter value corresponds to each effect mode on a one-to-one basis, and the MPU 102 sets the effect mode by updating the counter value of the effect mode counter. At the same time, the present production mode is grasped from the counter value of the production mode counter.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1002 or after execution of step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, based on the content of the type command received in step S1001, it is determined whether the game result of the game time started this time is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result C.

  If it is the most advantageous jackpot result or low-probable jackpot result C, in step S1006, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. In the symbol determination process, when the result is the most advantageous jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd number of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. To do. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in the case of the low probability winning result C, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If it is determined in step S1005 that neither the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C is found, the game result of the game start started this time is the most advantageous based on the contents of the type command in step S1007. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot result other than the jackpot result and the low probability jackpot result C or a special outlier result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S1008. In the symbol determination process, a common symbol combination (specifically, predetermined on one effective line L1 to L5 is set while preventing the same symbol combination from being established on any effective line L1 to L5. Determines the information corresponding to the stop result in which “3 · 4 · 1”) is established as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be configured in advance as a specific effective line.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1007, a normal determination symbol determination process is executed in step S1009. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to occurrence of outlier reach display. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of detachment symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the game times are not related to the occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the detach reach symbols is not stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  In addition, in the symbol determination process for normal removal, a configuration in which a stop result in which the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed may be selected.

  After executing any one of steps S1006, S1008, and S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this process, by referring to the production table stored in advance in the ROM 103, the production duration time (production duration period) corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time is selected, and Select content. In this case, an effect table is provided corresponding to each effect mode, and in step S1010, an effect duration time is selected with reference to the effect table corresponding to the current effect mode. Select the contents of. In addition, a lottery of whether or not to display a notice is also performed. The MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current game time according to the effect pattern determined in step S1007.

  In subsequent step S1011, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result of step S1006, step S1008, or step S1009 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result of step S1010 are transmitted to display control apparatus 111. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving these commands will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1001 or after the processing in step S1011 is executed, it is determined in step S1012 whether an opening command has been received. If the opening command has been received, an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1013.

  The effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is a low-probability winning result A, an unspecified high-probable winning result A, and a special outlier result. It is determined whether it is either. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1102.

  In step S1102, effect mode lottery processing is executed. The contents of the effect mode lottery process are the same as in step S1003. However, the selection of whether to use the low probability mode or the high probability mode as the effect lottery table is performed according to the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information included in the opening command is the low probability winning result A, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and when the information is the unspecified high probability winning result A, Select an effect lottery table for the high probability mode. Also, if the result is a special failure result, if the current success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected. If the current success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high probability mode is selected. Select a production lottery table.

  After executing the process of step S1102, in step S1103, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1102 is set as the transition destination effect mode. In a succeeding step S1104, the effect A1 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A1.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode that is executed in response to any one of the low likelihood winning result A, the non-explicit high probability winning result A, and the special outlier result is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A as described above, and its start The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the end to the end is almost common. The effect A1 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the production pattern corresponding to production A1 is subdivided so that the mode of light emission control and the mode of audio | voice output control may become a thing according to the lottery result of step S1102.

  In a succeeding step S1105, an effect A1-related command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A1-related command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A1 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1102. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving the command will be described later. After performing the process of step S1105, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, in step S1106, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is the low likelihood winning result B. Then, it is determined whether the non-explicit high probability hit result B or the explicit high probability hit result B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, effect mode lottery processing is executed. The contents of the effect mode lottery process are the same as in step S1003. However, the selection of whether to use the low probability mode or the high probability mode as the effect lottery table is performed according to the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, when the information included in the opening command is the low probability winning result B, the production lottery table for the low probability mode is selected, and the non-explicit high probability winning result B or the explicit high likelihood winning result is selected. In the case of B, an effect lottery table for the high probability mode is selected.

  After performing the process of step S1107, in step S1108, the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result of step S1107 is set as the effect mode of the transfer destination. In a succeeding step S1109, the effect A2 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A2.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with one of the low-accuracy big hit result B, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result B, and the explicit high-probability big hit result B is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B as already described. The opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is generally the same. The effect A2 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the production | generation pattern corresponding to production A2 is subdivided so that the aspect of light emission control and the aspect of audio | voice output control may become a thing according to the lottery result of step S1107.

  In a succeeding step S1110, an effect A2 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A2-related command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A2 should be performed, and information corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107. The processing contents of the display control device 111 upon receiving the command will be described later.

  In subsequent step S1111, based on the information included in the opening command received this time, it is determined whether or not the game result that has triggered the transmission of the command is the explicit high probability winning result B. If it is not the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B, the effect determination processing for the actual opening / closing execution mode is terminated as it is, and if it is the explicit high-precision big hit result B, the effect mode correction processing is executed in step S1112. After that, the effect determination process for the main opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  In the effect mode correction process, a process of correcting the effect mode setting from the effect mode corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S1107 to the highly reliable effect mode is executed. Thereby, when the effect for game times is started after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the effect for the game times is not the effect mode corresponding to the lottery result in step S1107, but the effect mode with high certainty. Done in In other words, when the explicit high probability winning result B is reached, the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are the case of the low probability winning result B and the non-explicit high probability winning result B in which the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 is common. The same effect A2 is selected, but after the opening / closing execution mode, unlike the case of the low-accuracy large hit result B and the case of the unspecified high-probability hit result B, the high-definition effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1106, based on the information included in the opening command received this time in step S1113, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is an explicit high probability winning result. A is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1113, the process proceeds to step S1114.

  In step S1114, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the effect mode setting process, a highly reliable effect mode is set as a transition destination effect mode. In a succeeding step S1115, the effect A3 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A3.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with the explicit high probability winning result A as an opportunity is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A as described above, and the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end is low. This is common to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by any one of the probable hit result A, the non-explicit high probable hit result A and the special outlier result. The effect A3 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds, but the content of the effect is different from the effect A1.

  In a subsequent step S1116, an effect A3 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A3 command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A3 should be performed. Since the transition destination of the production mode when the production A3 is selected is fixed in the highly reliable production mode as described above, the production A3 command includes dedicated information for individually identifying the production mode. Is not included. After executing the process of step S1116, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1113, based on the information included in the opening command received this time in step S1117, the game result that triggered the transmission of the command is an explicit high-probability winning result. It is determined whether it is C. If a positive determination is made in step S1117, the process proceeds to step S1118.

  In step S1118, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the effect mode setting process, a highly reliable effect mode is set as a transition destination effect mode. In a succeeding step S1119, the effect A4 table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the production pattern corresponding to the production A4. Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with the explicit high probability winning result C as a trigger is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C as described above. The effect A3 is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing pattern proceeds.

  In a succeeding step S1120, an effect A4 command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect A4 command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect A4 should be performed. After executing the process of step S1120, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1117, it means that the game result that triggered the transmission of the opening command is either the low probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, and the process proceeds to step S1121. .

  In step S1121, effect mode setting processing is executed. In the setting process of the production mode, when the game result that is the trigger is the low probability hit result C, the production mode with the low expectation level is set as the transition destination production mode, and the game result that is the trigger is displayed. When the result is the most advantageous big hit result, the production mode with a high probability is set as the production mode of the transition destination. In subsequent step S1122, the effect B table is read. In this case, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current opening / closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 59 according to the effect pattern corresponding to the effect B. Here, the opening / closing execution mode executed with one of the low-probability big hit result C and the most advantageous big hit result as an opportunity is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D as already described. The effect B is set corresponding to the duration of the opening / closing execution mode when proceeding with the opening / closing pattern.

  In a succeeding step S1123, an effect B command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In this case, the effect B command includes information indicating that a display effect corresponding to the effect B should be performed. After executing the process of step S1123, the effect determination process for the full opening / closing execution mode is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the effect determination process (FIG. 20), when a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the process of step S1013 is executed, it is determined in step S1014 whether a premium command is received. As described above, the premium command is transmitted when a winning to the big prize opening 32a occurs in the first round of the round number regulation mode and the open state of the variable winning device 32 is a short time mode. .

  If a premium command has been received, a premium effect determination process is executed in step S1015. The MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 so that a premium effect is performed as a corresponding effect during the current round number regulation mode.

  In a succeeding step S1016, a premium effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. The MPU 113 of the display control device 111 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that a premium effect is performed during the current round number regulation mode. For example, an image such as a special character that does not appear in the effect for the normal opening / closing execution mode is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to display a premium video.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1014 or after the processing in step S1016 is executed, it is determined in step S1017 whether or not a teaching command is received. As described above, the teaching command, in the open / close number regulation mode triggered by a special outage result, before the opening of the upper limit number of winning holes 32a is performed, the game balls for the winning holes 32a Sent when the number of winnings reaches the upper limit.

  If a teaching command has been received, a teaching effect determination process is executed in step S1018. In the MPU 102, during the current opening / closing number regulation mode, the effect table to be referred to is changed so that the content of the effect to be executed is switched from the effect A1 to the effect for teaching. As a result, the MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 so as to correspond to the teaching effect.

  In addition, when the open / close number regulation mode is terminated based on the number of game balls awarded to the big prize opening 32a reaching the upper limit, regardless of whether the number of times the big prize opening 32a is opened reaches the upper limit. Then, after the ending standby time has elapsed, the open / close number regulation mode is terminated. Corresponding to this, the production continuation time of the teaching effect corresponds to the ending standby time, more specifically, the same as the ending standby time.

  In the subsequent step S1019, a teaching effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. In the MPU 113 of the display control device 111, the presentation table to be referred to is changed so that the content of the display presentation to be executed is switched from the presentation A1 to the teaching presentation during the current opening / closing number regulation mode. The display of the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that a teaching effect is performed. For example, an image such as a character or a character indicating that the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a special outage result is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be used in which a moving image for teaching is displayed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1017 or after the processing in step S1019 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1020. In the other processing, for example, processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on reception of a round start command, a round end command, and an ending command. However, the process for advancing the presentation based on the reception of the round start command and the round end command is not executed in a round game in which the big prize opening 32a is opened and closed in a short time mode, and a big prize in a long time mode. It is executed in a round game in which the mouth 32a is opened and closed. Thereafter, the effect determination process ends.

  When the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 receives a command related to the new setting of the effect table in the situation where the execution control of the effect is performed according to the predetermined effect table, the effect currently being performed is stopped. The production corresponding to the newly received command is started.

<V interrupt processing executed by display control device 111>
Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 113 in the display control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is periodically started by the MPU 113 (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec).

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether a new command has been received. If a new command has been received, data table selection processing is executed in step S1202. The data table is an information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing is displayed when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. It is.

  Incidentally, if the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 receives a command related to the new selection of the data table in a situation where the display control is performed according to the predetermined data table, A display effect corresponding to the newly received command is started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, or after executing the process of step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, it is possible for the MPU 113 to grasp processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In subsequent step S1204, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, the type of image data necessary for instructing drawing to the VDP 116 and the parameters applied to the grasped image data are determined. Perform the operation.

  Thereafter, after executing the drawing list output process in step S1205, the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 116. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process becomes a drawing target in the video RAM 118, and the parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 116, necessary image data is read from the character ROM 117 according to the drawing list, and set in the frame buffer of the video RAM 118 in a state where the parameters are applied to the read image data. Thereby, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, an image signal is output to the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the created drawing data, whereby an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  Here, the commands received by the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 from the sound emission control device 72 include a stop result command and a pattern command. When these commands are received, in step S1202, a data table necessary for executing the game turning effects corresponding to the respective commands on the symbol display device 41 is selected. In this case, a video of a game-playing effect is displayed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, but the display content corresponds to the current effect mode. In addition, in the game turn effect moving image, the stop result determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 is finally stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the common symbol determination process is executed in the MPU 102, the timing at which the common symbol combination is displayed is limited to the timing at which the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is ended in the game rotation effect. For example, a common symbol combination may be displayed in the middle of the variable display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, or a common symbol combination may be displayed during reach display. May be displayed, a common symbol combination may be displayed after a display indicating that the reach display has been removed, and a combination of symbols that is normally out of display is stopped. After that, a common symbol combination may be displayed.

  The received command includes an open / close execution mode command. When the command is received, in step S1202, a data table necessary for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the command on the symbol display device 41 is selected. Specifically, the command for the opening / closing execution mode includes an effect A1 command, an effect A2 command, an effect A3 command, an effect A4 command, and an effect B command, as already described. The data table corresponding to each command is selected. In addition, since the production A1 command and the production A2 command include information corresponding to the lottery result of the production mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107), the data table of the production A1 and the production A2 system A data table corresponding to each lottery result is selected as the data table.

  The data table of effect A1, the data table of effect A2, and the data table of effect A3 are demonstrated in detail using FIG. FIG. 23 (a) shows a data table for effect A1, FIG. 23 (b) shows a data table for effect A2, and FIG. 23 (c) shows a data table for effect A3.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c), each data table includes information on the number of frames, which is information indicating the number of frames from the start of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, Information on the use data group used in each frame is set in a one-to-one correspondence. In this case, as already described, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A from which the effect A1 or the effect A3 is selected and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B from which the effect A2 is selected are the start timing. There is a section in which the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 is common from to the middle timing. Further, in the common section, the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a is a short-time mode in which the winning of the game balls does not substantially occur or the winning of the upper limit number of game balls does not substantially occur. The time required for this does not vary depending on the winning status of the big winning opening 32a. In correspondence with the existence of the common section, in each data table of FIGS. 23A to 23C, the production is shared.

  That is, the same use data group is set for the number of frames F (1) to F (q-x-1), and as shown in FIG. An effect is made to predict which of the effect mode and the high expectation effect mode is to be shifted to. Further, the same use data group is set for the subsequent frame numbers F (q−x) to F (q−y−1), and as shown in FIG. An effect as if the transition destination has been determined is performed. In this case, in the production A1 and the production A2, the production mode corresponding to the lottery result of the production mode lottery process (step S1102 or step S1107) is displayed as the transition destination. In the production A3, the production mode with a high expectation level is displayed as the transition destination. The number of frames F (1) to F (q−y−1) corresponds to the common effect, and the timing at which the common effect ends is the end timing of the common section.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which the common effect ends may be before or after the end timing of the common section. However, in linking the common section according to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 and the common performance according to the display mode of the symbol display device 41, the period in which both are performed should be overlapped to the extent that the player can recognize that they are the same. Is preferred.

  On the other hand, after the frame number F (q−y), an image corresponding to each effect is displayed. That is, in the production A1, the production in the state in which the transition destination is determined up to the final frame F (q) is performed.

  In the production A2, in the number of frames F (q−y) to F (q), as shown in FIG. 23 (C), there is an production showing that further production is developed in the opening / closing execution mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 23D, an effect indicating that the pattern B is in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Thereafter, a predetermined effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is performed until the final frame F (r).

  Further, in the production A3, in the number of frames F (q−y) to F (q), as shown in FIG. 23 (C), there is an production showing that further production is developed in the opening / closing execution mode. As shown in FIG. 23 (E), the game result that triggered the transition to the current open / close execution mode indicates that the game result is an explicit high probability hit result A, or whether the game result is after the open / close execution mode. An effect indicating that the lottery mode is the high probability mode is performed.

  Incidentally, the data table of the effect A4 is set so that the same effect as in the case of the effect A2 is performed from the number of frames F (1) to F (q), but the effect after that is the effect A2. It is set so that an effect different from the case of is performed. In addition, in the data table of effect B, the common effect is not set, and an effect different from any of effect A1 to effect A4 is performed.

  The received command includes a premium command. When the command is received, in step S1202, a character or character corresponding to the premium effect is added to the image according to the currently set open / close execution mode data table. The received command includes a teaching effect command. When the command is received, in step S1202, a process of switching from the currently set data table for the opening / closing execution mode to the data table for teaching effects is executed. Thereby, the display effect to be executed is switched from the effect A1 to the teaching effect, and an image in which characters and characters corresponding to the teaching effect appear is displayed.

<About game results>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the above various processes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game results set in the pachinko machine 10 other than the normal losing result include a low likelihood winning result A, a low likelihood winning result B, a low likelihood winning result C, and an unspecified highly likely winning result A. , Non-explicit high probability jackpot result B, explicit high probability jackpot result A, explicit high probability jackpot result B, explicit high probability jackpot result C, most advantageous jackpot result and special outlier result.

  Among these game results, the various jackpot results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is won, and the special loss results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is not won. In addition, the various jackpot results are game results that become a transition opportunity for either the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, unlike the special loss results, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG. .

  Each game result listed in FIG. 24 triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, but the contents of the opening / closing execution mode of the transition destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each open / close execution mode will be described below with reference to FIG. 25 in addition to FIG. FIG. 25 is a timing chart for explaining the contents of each open / close execution mode. FIG. 25 shows a case where the upper limit number of game balls are not won in the big prize opening 32a in each round game in the round number regulation mode.

  First, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24, in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode that is shifted by either the low-probability jackpot result C or the most advantageous jackpot result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the maximum number of times being 15 times. In each round game, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once for a long time. As a result, the player can receive a large amount of game balls.

  Next, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (a), in the low probability winning result A, the non-explicit high probability winning result A and the explicit high probability winning result A, the round number regulation mode in which round games are performed with the maximum number of times being 15 times. In each round game, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a short time mode. Further, as shown in FIG. 24, in the special loss result, the mode shifts to the open / closed number defining mode instead of the round number defining mode, and the large winning opening 32 a is opened and closed 15 times in a short time mode.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the special prize opening 32a is opened and closed only in a short time mode, the number of times is 15 times, and the total number of times of opening and closing the special prize opening 32a is 15. As described above, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed only in a short time mode, so that even when the pattern A is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the game balls are not substantially paid out to the player. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's ball.

  In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, not only the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 32a but also the opening waiting time, the time between successive opening / closing operations, and the ending waiting time are the same. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is visually the same regardless of the game result that triggered the shift, and any game from the operation of the variable winning device 32 The player cannot grasp whether the result is an opportunity.

  Incidentally, the pachinko machine 10 is not provided with a dedicated display unit indicating that it is in the round number regulation mode, and the upper limit number of rounds in the round number regulation mode is the same. There is no dedicated display section indicating the number of times the operation is performed. Therefore, it is impossible to grasp which of the round number regulation mode and the open / close number regulation mode based on the dedicated display section.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A), the symbol display device 41 has a game chance that is one of the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result. The combination of common symbols is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (B) to 25 (C), the effects in the opening / closing execution mode from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode to at least halfway timing. Is also common. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed, which game result is triggered even if an effect including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed at least until the middle of the timing? I can't figure out. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed, the player can play a game while predicting which game result is triggered. In FIG. 25, an effect as shown in FIG. 25B is performed until the timing of t1, and an effect as shown in FIG. 25C is performed from the timing of t1.

  Here, when the explicit high probability hit result A is obtained, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode up to that point. Therefore, for example, in the case of the low-frequency support mode, when the result is an explicit high-probability hit result A and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player moves to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the player Can recognize that the game result that is the trigger of the transition is an explicit high-accuracy big hit result A.

  Corresponding to such circumstances, when the result is an explicit high-accuracy big hit result A, from the timing t2 when the last opening / closing in the opening / closing execution mode is completed until the ending standby time elapses, FIG. (D) and a finalized effect as shown in FIG. 25 (E) are performed. As a result, when the explicit high probability winning result A is reached, the player predicts which game result is triggered until the middle of the opening / closing execution mode, while the explicit high probability winning result A is obtained from the middle. It is possible to teach that. In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is performed, the player will play the game with the expectation that the finalized effect will be performed, thereby improving the degree of attention of the game in the opening / closing execution mode. it can. Furthermore, since the timing at which the finalized effect is started is the timing at which the final opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is difficult to determine which game result is triggered by the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. It is possible to achieve the effect by performing the above-mentioned definite effect without losing the effect of performing.

  On the other hand, when the low likelihood winning result A, the non-explicit high probability winning result A, and the special outlier result trigger the transition, the previous support mode is continued. Furthermore, when these game results trigger the transition, the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are common from the start timing to the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, when the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-probability big hit result A, and the special outlier result trigger the transition, the player is set to either the low probability mode or the high probability mode. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether or not, and the degree of attention of the game after the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  However, in the open / close execution mode in which the special loss result is the trigger for the transition, the open / close number regulation mode is executed instead of the round number regulation mode, unlike the low likelihood jackpot result A and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A. Thus, depending on the winning mode of the game ball to the big prize opening 32a during the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, the player can determine whether or not the game result that has been the trigger is a special outage result. . This will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  26 (a) and 26 (b) show a case where the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed in response to a special loss result, and FIG. 26 (c) shows the opening / closing of pattern A in response to any jackpot result. Indicates when the execution mode is executed. FIGS. 26 (a-1), (b-1), and (c-1) show the open status of the special winning opening 32a, and FIGS. 26 (a-2), (b-2), and (c-2). ) Shows the winning situation of the game ball to the big winning opening 32a.

  A case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special losing result will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing t11 when the common effect as shown in FIG. 26 (A) is already started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the first opening in the short winning mode 32a is started in the short time mode. Is done. Thereafter, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is repeated, and the content of the common effect progresses to the content as shown in FIG. 26B at the timing t13 when the 12th opening is started. To do. Then, at the timing of t14, the final opening of the special winning opening 32a is completed, and the waiting time for ending is reached.

  In this case, at the timing t12, a single winning at the big winning opening 32a has occurred, but no other winning at the large winning opening 32a has occurred. Since the upper limit number of the open / close number regulation mode is set to two as already described, the open / close execution mode ends when the special winning opening 32a is opened over the upper limit number of times.

  The case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special losing result ends when the upper limit number of game balls have been won for the special winning opening 32a will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing t21 when the common effect as shown in FIG. 26 (A) is already started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the first opening in the short winning mode 32a is started. Is done. Thereafter, opening and closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode is repeated, but at the timing of t22, one winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 32a occurs and the opening of the final big prize opening 32a is started. A second winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 32a occurs at a timing t23, which is a timing before the winning.

  In this case, since the end condition for the upper limit number of game balls to be awarded to the big winning opening 32a is satisfied, the final opening of the big winning opening 32a is not started, but the waiting time for ending Be started. At the timing t23, the common effect is stopped on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the teaching effect as shown in FIG. 26C is started.

  The case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed with the jackpot result as an opportunity will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing t31 when the common effect as shown in FIG. 26 (A) has already started on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the first opening in the short winning mode 32a is started. Is done. Thereafter, opening and closing of the special winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is repeated.

  In this case, the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening 32a occurs once at each of the timing of t32, the timing of t33, and the timing of t34. However, this time it is a round number regulation mode, the upper limit number is reset for each round game and the big prize opening 32a is opened only once in each round game. Even if it occurs three times, the opening / closing execution mode does not end.

  In addition, in the twelfth opening of the big winning opening 32a, the display content on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the content shown in FIG. 26B, as in FIG. Is done.

  As described above, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the special miss result, when the upper limit number of game balls are won for the big winning opening 32a, the number of opening / closing ends regardless of the number of opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a so far. It becomes a regulation mode. Further, the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number related to the opening of the special winning opening 32a. Accordingly, the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened varies depending on the state of occurrence of the winning with respect to the special winning opening 32a. Thereby, the player can open and close by confirming that the number of times of opening / closing the grand prize opening 32a is less than the upper limit number (that is, less than the number corresponding to the common section) by continuing to fire the game ball in the common section. It is possible to clearly grasp that the game result that triggered the execution of the execution mode is a special outage result.

  By the way, it can be said that the upper limit number in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special outage result is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number that is one end condition of the round game. In other words, the total number of the upper limit numbers in the common section in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special outlier result is the upper limit number in the common section in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result. It is set to a number smaller than the total number.

  Also, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special losing result ends without reaching the upper limit number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a, the common effect is canceled on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Teaching production is started. As a result, even if the player has not confirmed the number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a, if the opening / closing execution mode ends without the number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a reaching the upper limit number, the player It is possible to clearly grasp that has occurred.

  Further, when the number of game balls entered reaches the upper limit number in the final opening of the variable winning device 32 in the common section, the teaching effect is not executed. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the teaching effect is performed, it is easy for the player to pay attention to the manner in which the game balls are entered into the variable prize device 32 and the number of times the variable prize device 32 is released. In this configuration, the opening duration when the big winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode is such that at least immediately after the opening in the short time mode is started, one game ball is won. It is more effective when applied to a configuration that is set to be longer than the time at which a person can recognize that the opening duration is longer than the opening duration when the opening is terminated when the opening is ended.

  In addition, the player who knows the upper limit number of opening / closing execution modes triggered by the special loss result continues to fire the game ball in the common section and the winning number 32a is generated for the upper limit number. Nevertheless, by confirming that the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is continued, it is clearly understood that the opening / closing execution mode is not triggered by a special outage result but triggered by a jackpot result. be able to.

  In addition, since the big winning opening 32a is opened in a short time in the common section, even if the game balls are continuously fired, the upper limit number of game balls is not always generated. The probability that the upper limit number of game balls is won is lower than the probability that no game ball wins. Therefore, when the low probability winning result A, the non-explicit high probability winning result A, and the special outlier result trigger the transition, the game is performed while predicting which of the lottery modes will be set after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to increase the player's sense of superiority when it is possible to determine whether the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by a special outage result.

  Next, the case where the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 (b), in the low probability winning result B, the non-explicit high probability winning result B, and the explicit high likelihood winning result B, the round number regulation mode in which round games are performed with the upper limit being 15 times. The total winning opening 32a is opened and closed 16 times in a short time manner in total in the 1R and 2R round games that have continued from the start timing. In other words, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game. In other words, in one round game, there occurs at least once a phenomenon that the special winning opening 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently opened again. By the way, when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration that becomes one end condition of the round game is the opening duration in each short time mode, The time is the same as or slightly longer than the sum of the waiting times between a plurality of consecutive open / close operations. In each round game of the 3R to 15R, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a long time mode.

  That is, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the big prize opening 32a is first opened and closed 16 times in a short time mode, and then the big prize opening 32a is opened and closed 13 times in a long time mode. The total number of times the winning opening 32a is opened and closed is 29 times. Thereby, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the payout of the game ball to the player is not substantially generated from the start timing to the midway timing, but after the midway timing, a large amount of game balls to the player Payout occurs. However, the payout amount of game balls expected to be acquired in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is smaller than that in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode.

  The opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is not only the opening / closing mode of the grand prize opening 32a, but also the waiting time for opening, the time between successive opening / closing operations, and the waiting time for ending are the same among the game results that trigger the transition It has become. Therefore, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is visually similar regardless of the game result that triggered the transition, and any game from the operation of the variable winning device 32 The player cannot grasp whether the result is an opportunity.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A), the symbol display device 41 has a common symbol in the game times in which one of the low probability jackpot result B, the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B, and the explicit high probability jackpot result B. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are common from the start timing to the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, even if the effect including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed, it is understood in the opening / closing execution mode which game result is the trigger. Can not do it. Therefore, when the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player can play a game while predicting which game result is triggered.

  When one of the low probability jackpot result B and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B triggers the transition, the previous support mode is continued. Therefore, when either the low probability winning result B or the non-explicit high probability winning result B is triggered, the player determines whether the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode or the high probability mode. The game can be performed while predicting the game, and the degree of attention of the game after the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  Here, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the winning to the big winning opening 32a occurs in the situation that the first round of the round number regulation mode is 1R and the opening manner of the big winning opening 32a is a short time aspect. Although the premium effect is executed, the effect of executing the premium effect in relation to the pattern B opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 27 (a) shows a case where the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B is executed in response to the low probability jackpot result B or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B, and FIG. The case where the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B is executed is shown. 27 (a-1) and (b-1) show the execution status of the round game, and FIGS. 27 (a-2) and (b-2) show the open status of the big prize opening 32a. (A-3) and (b-3) show the winning situation of the game ball to the big winning opening 32a.

  A case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed in response to the low probability big hit result B or the non-explicit high big hit result B and the premium effect is not executed will be described with reference to FIG. .

  On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the 1R round game is started at the timing t11, which is the situation where the common effect as shown in FIG. The first opening in the short time mode is started. Thereafter, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is repeated, and at the timing t12, the eighth opening is completed and the 1R round game is completed.

  After that, at the timing of t13, the 2R round game is started, and the ninth opening in the short winning mode 32a is started. Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode is repeated, and the winning of the game ball to the big prize opening 32a occurs at the timing of t14 which is the tenth opening time. However, since the premium effect is executed on the condition that it is the first round in the round number regulation mode, the premium effect is not executed when a winning is made at the timing of t14.

  Thereafter, the content of the common effect progresses to the content as shown in FIG. 27B at the timing of t15, and the confirmed effect as shown in FIG. 27C is started at the timing of t16. Then, at the timing of t17, the 16th release ends and the 2R round game ends. In addition, after the 2R round game is completed, the 3rd round and subsequent round games are performed in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner.

  A case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed with the explicit high probability winning result B as an opportunity and the premium effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  On the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the 1R round game is started at the timing t21, which is the situation where the common effect as shown in FIG. The first opening in the short time mode is started. Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode is repeated, and the winning of the game ball with respect to the big prize opening 32a occurs at the timing of t22 which is the tenth opening time.

  In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the low probability jackpot result B or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result B, the tenth opening time corresponds to the 2R round game as described with reference to FIG. Thus, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high probability winning result B, the tenth opening time corresponds to the 1R round game. Therefore, at the timing of t22, as shown in FIG. 27D, the special character CH is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 as a premium effect.

  Thereafter, the content of the common effect progresses to the content as shown in FIG. 27B at the timing of t23, and the finalized effect as shown in FIG. 27C is started at the timing of t24. In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, the display of the special character CH ends at the timing of t23, but instead, the special character CH is displayed even if the content of the common effect has progressed or the final effect has been started. The display of the character CH may be continued. That is, the premium effect may be continued even when the content of the common effect progresses or when the confirmed effect is started. In such a configuration, the possibility that the player misses the premium effect is reduced.

  Thereafter, at the time t25, the opening of the 15th big winning opening 32a is completed and the 1R round game is finished. In addition, the 2R round game is started at the timing of t26 and the 16th opening in the short winning mode 32a is started at the timing of the big winning opening 32a. The eye round game ends.

  As described above, the premium effect is executed when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a in the situation that the first round of the number-of-rounds regulation mode is the short-time aspect of the big prize opening 32a. However, the number of times of opening and closing in the short time mode assigned to the round game of the 1R is the same as in the case of the explicit high probability hit result B Are higher than in the case of the low likelihood jackpot result B and the implicit high likelihood jackpot result B. As a result, the probability that the premium performance will be executed in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B is greater than the case where either the low-high probability big win result B or the non-explicit high-precision big hit result B is triggered. Can be increased. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B occurs, it is unclear which jackpot result is the trigger from the aspect of the effect for opening / closing execution mode excluding the premium effect and the aspect of the big prize opening 32a. When the premier effect is performed, it is possible to predict that the possibility of the explicit high probability hit result B is relatively high.

  In addition, in the short time mode from the start timing to the eighth time, the prize winning to the big prize opening 32a has not occurred, and the premium effect is based on the fact that the winning to the big prize opening 32a has occurred in the short time aspect after the ninth time. The player who has confirmed that the game has been performed can clearly recognize that the currently executed opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the execution of the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B.

  By the way, between the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high probability hit result B and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the low probability big hit result B and the non-explicit high probability big hit result B, the big winning opening 32a in a short time mode is used. In a section (hereinafter also referred to as a predetermined section) that is executed in common (that is, in a low-identification mode) in an appearance that is similar in appearance to the opening / closing of the prize winning opening 32a is basically performed 16 times. However, in the former opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined section is relatively shortened in the former opening / closing execution mode, whereas in the latter opening / closing execution mode, the predetermined section is relative. It is hard to be shortened.

  Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-probability big hit result B, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a short time mode is performed 15 times in the 1R round game included in the predetermined section, and the 2R In the round game, the grand prize opening 32a is opened and closed once in a short time mode, so that the total number of times of opening and closing in the predetermined section is 16. In this case, the upper limit number to the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending each round game, is nine. In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 is less than the upper limit number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 in some round games among a plurality of round games included in the predetermined section. It has become a number.

  On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the low probability winning result B and the non-explicit high probability winning result B, the opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a in the short-time mode is performed eight times in the 1R round game included in the predetermined section. At the same time, in the 2R round game, the grand prize opening 32a is opened and closed eight times in a short time manner, so that the total number of times of opening and closing in the predetermined section is 16. In this case, the upper limit number to the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending each round game as described above, is nine. In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the upper limit number of winning / opening of the variable winning device 32 exceeds the upper limit number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 in all the round games included in the predetermined section.

  Since the predetermined section of each opening / closing execution mode is set as described above, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B, the special winning opening 32a is opened once in the short-time mode in the 1Rth. When one game ball wins each time it is performed, the predetermined section ends without performing 16 times of opening and closing that is the common maximum number of times of opening and closing. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode triggered by the low probability winning result B and the non-explicit high probability winning result B, the big winning opening 32a is opened once in a short time mode in the 1R and 2R round games. Even if one game ball is won each time, 16 times of opening and closing, which is a common maximum number of times of opening and closing, are performed in a predetermined section.

  That is, the probability that the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a in the predetermined section will not reach the maximum number of opening / closing according to the winning mode of the game ball is lower when the explicit high probability winning result B is used as a trigger. It becomes higher than the case where the result B and the implicit high probability hit result B are triggered. Thus, when a maximum number of winnings for a round game occurs in a predetermined section, it is possible to check which game result is obtained by checking whether the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode has reached the maximum number of opening / closing. It becomes possible to grasp to some extent whether it is an opportunity.

  Next, a case where the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (c), in the explicit high probability winning result C, a transition is made to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number, and in the round game of the 1R, the short-time mode After opening / closing the 18th prize winning opening 32a, the opening / closing of the one big winning prize opening 32a is performed in the middle time mode. That is, not only the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed a plurality of times in one round game, but also the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed in different types of opening modes during one round game. By the way, when the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed a plurality of times in one round game as described above, the upper limit duration that becomes one end condition of the round game is the opening duration in each short time mode, It is the same as or slightly longer than the sum of the opening duration in the medium time mode and the waiting time between a plurality of consecutive opening and closing operations. Further, in each round game of 2R to 15R, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once in a long time mode.

  That is, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, first, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is performed 18 times, and subsequently, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the medium time mode is performed once, Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner is performed 14 times, so the total number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a is 33 times. Thereby, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the payout of the game ball to the player does not substantially occur from the start timing to the midway timing, but after the midway timing, a large amount of game balls to the player Payout occurs. In this case, the amount of game balls that are expected to be acquired is equivalent to that in the pattern D opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, comparison of the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C will be described.

  In both cases where the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, the high probability mode may be set as the success / failure lottery mode, and the low probability mode is set. Sometimes. However, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the pattern is more than the probability that the non-explicit high probability winning result A and the explicit high probability winning result A are selected among various game results that trigger the pattern A opening / closing execution mode. The probability that either the non-explicit high probability hit result B or the explicit high probability hit result B is selected among various game results that trigger the opening / closing execution mode of B is set high. Therefore, when the pattern B opening / closing execution mode is executed, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the success / failure lottery mode becomes a high probability mode than when the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), in the case of the pattern A, in the case of the pattern B and the case of the pattern C, the big winning opening 32a in the short time mode from the start timing is displayed. Opening and closing is continuously performed 15 times. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 25 (A), a common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the game times corresponding to the patterns A to C, as well as FIG. 25 (B). As shown in FIG. 25 (C), the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are also common until the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is performed 15 times from the start timing. Thereby, when opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a in the short time mode is started, the player predicts which of the opening / closing execution modes is the pattern A to the pattern C from the start timing to the middle timing. You can play games.

  Further, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is continuously performed 15 times from the start timing, and after the common section is finished, the big winning port 32a in the short time mode is further opened. Opening and closing is performed once. Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, after the common winning section 32a is opened / closed 15 times in a short time from the start timing and the common section is completed, the large winning opening 32a in the short time mode is further opened. Opening and closing is performed three times. Thereby, the player can grasp which of the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C is counted by counting the number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode from the start timing. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the operation mode of the variable winning device 32 during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the pattern B and pattern C opening / closing execution modes, as shown in FIG. 25D and FIG. 25F, from the timing t2 when the last opening / closing related to the common section with the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is completed. Pattern B and pattern C are confirmed. As a result, when one of the opening / closing execution modes of the pattern B and the pattern C is entered, the player is predicted which opening / closing execution mode until the common section elapses from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode. From the middle, it is possible to teach that the pattern B or pattern C is in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in the common section, the player plays the game while expecting the finalized effect, and the degree of attention of the game during the opening / closing execution mode can be improved. Furthermore, since the timing at which the finalized effect is started is the timing at which the last opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 ends, it is difficult to determine which opening / closing execution mode is based on the opening / closing mode of the variable winning device 32. Without losing the effect of the above, it is possible to achieve the effect by performing the above-mentioned definite effect.

  By the way, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times during one round game, so that in the configuration where the upper limit number of round games is the same, it continues from the start timing. While the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a is the same as that of the pattern A and the case of the pattern B, the pattern winning opening 32a can be opened and closed in the pattern B after the common opening mode.

  Also, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, the special winning opening 32a is opened / closed a plurality of times during one round game, and after opening / closing in a short time mode is completed, switching to opening / closing in a medium time mode is performed. As a result, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is the same, the opening mode of the big winning opening 32a that is continuous from the start timing is the same as the pattern A to pattern B, and after the common opening mode It is possible to win a maximum number of game balls in the same round game.

<External output from pachinko machine 10 to hall computer HC>
Next, a configuration for external output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC will be described. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram for explaining an outline of an electrical configuration of a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  As shown in FIG. 28, an island facility S is provided in the game hall, and a number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the island facility S. In the island facility S, a data counter DC is installed to correspond to each pachinko machine 10 on a one-to-one basis. Each data counter DC is mounted above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and includes a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of game times executed, and a first display unit DC1 for displaying the number of times of execution of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode. 2 display part DC2 is provided.

  A hall computer HC is provided in the game hall as management control means for managing each pachinko machine 10 and each data counter DC. The hall computer HC is an electronic arithmetic unit having a management program, and an MPU 201 is mounted therein. In the MPU 201, various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and ROM 202 storing fixed value data, and various data and information input from the pachinko machine 10 when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed are temporarily stored. And a RAM 203 which is a memory for storing the data.

  The hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through an electrical wiring group EL1, and is also electrically connected to each data counter DC through an electrical wiring group EL2. And while performing the management process based on the information received from each pachinko machine 10, the signal according to the result of the management process is transmitted to each data counter DC.

  Here, the configuration for transmitting information to the hall computer HC in the pachinko machine 10 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 showing the external terminal board 81 and its periphery in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 29B illustrates an external output buffer 94d provided in the RAM 94 of the main controller 71. FIG. 29C is a block diagram for explaining the electrical configuration of the external terminal board 81.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, the external terminal plate 81 is provided with a plurality of external terminals (output terminals) 81a to 81h. A total of eight external terminals 81a to 81h are provided, and the types of information output to the hall computer HC are different.

  The jackpot external terminal 81a is used to output information (winning information or winning signal) indicating that the main control device 71 is in the open / close execution mode based on the winning / losing lottery. The external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is information (open / close execution information or open / close information indicating that the open / close execution mode is based on the fact that the main control device 71 has won a big hit or a special loss result) This is used to output an execution signal. The conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in the open / close execution mode of any of patterns B to D, or the jackpot is won in the winning lottery and the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is set to the high frequency support mode after the end. It is used to output information (conditional winning information or conditional winning signal) indicating that it is in the set opening / closing execution mode.

  The jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c are all used to output information indicating that they are in the open / close execution mode. The conditions for outputting are different.

  In particular, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is in an opening / closing execution mode in which a player is actually throwing a ball, or a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is set as the above condition. Therefore, no information is output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special outage result, and the low probability support result A in the low frequency support mode. Alternatively, information is not output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c even during the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result of the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A. As a result, when the player can recognize that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is different from the one triggered by the special outage result, the information is output externally and the special outage result is used as an opportunity. When it is impossible to recognize that it is different from the one, it is possible to provide a terminal that does not externally output information to the game hall.

  In addition to the external terminals 81a to 81c, the external terminals 81a to 81h are connected to the support mode external terminal 81d used for outputting information indicating that the support mode is in the high frequency support mode. An external terminal 81e for the number of games used to output information indicating that the game round of the game has been completed, and an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that a winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred. 81f, an external terminal 81g used to output information indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out, and information indicating that a predetermined fraud has been detected is used. And an external terminal 81h. The types of the external terminals 81a to 81h are not limited to those described above. For example, the external terminals used for outputting information indicating that the gaming machine main body 12 is open or the front door frame 14 are used. There may be provided an external terminal used for outputting information indicating that is open.

  A plurality of output setting unit areas 121 to 128 are provided in the external output buffer 94d of the RAM 94 of the main controller 71 in a one-to-one correspondence with the external terminals 81a to 81h. Each output setting unit area 121 to 128 has an information amount of a predetermined bit, specifically 1 bit, and each unit area 121 to 128 has “0” as no-output information and an output. Any information “1” as information is set. Note that the amount of information in each of the unit areas 121 to 128 is not limited to 1 bit and is arbitrary, and the data structure of the no-output information and the output-present information is also arbitrary.

  The main controller 71 is electrically connected to the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal board 81 in a one-to-one correspondence through the electric wiring group EL3 shown in FIG. A signal having a predetermined voltage is output to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which “1” is set.

  As shown in FIG. 29C, each of the external terminals 81a to 81h is capable of transmitting an electric signal from the main control device 71 to the hall computer HC, while preventing the reverse flow. It is constituted by. A light emitting diode 132 that is the primary side of the photocoupler 131 is connected to the main controller 71 via a resistor 133, and a light receiving element (phototransistor) 134 that is a secondary side is connected to the hall computer HC. Therefore, when a signal is output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81h corresponding to the unit areas 121 to 128 in which “1” is set in the external output buffer 94d, the external signal from which the signal is output is output. The light emitting diodes 132 of the terminals 81a to 81h emit light, and the light is received by the light receiving element 134 of the external terminals 81a to 81h and converted into an electric signal, and the electric signal is output to the hall computer HC.

  Note that the form of the electrical signal output to the hall computer HC is arbitrary, and a signal of 0V is output in a situation in which no external output is made from the main controller 71, and a predetermined value greater than 0V is generated by the external output. It is also possible to output a signal having a voltage of 1 or a mode in which the output pattern of the signal has a reverse relationship. Further, in a situation where no external output is made from the main control device 71, a signal having a reference voltage larger than 0V is output, and a signal having a voltage larger or smaller than the reference voltage is outputted by making an external output. It is good.

<About processing related to external output executed by main controller 71>
Next, processing related to external output executed by the main controller 71 will be described. However, in the following description, among the external terminals 81a to 81h of the external terminal plate 81, the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and the support mode A configuration related to an external output through the external terminal 81d will be mainly described.

  The process for starting external output through the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is included in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15) already described. Specifically, an external output setting process at the time of mode transition in step S511 and an external output setting process for delay in step S512. These two external output setting processes have different execution timings. The external output setting process at the time of the mode transition in step S511 is executed when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the delay external output setting process in step S512 is the opening / closing process. It is repeatedly executed after the execution mode is started.

<External output setting process during mode transition>
First, the external output setting process at the time of mode transition will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is any jackpot result. If it is any jackpot result, in step S1302, “1” is set in the first unit area 121 corresponding to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the external output buffer 94d, and the open / close execution mode external mode is set. “1” is set in the second unit area 122 corresponding to the terminal 81b. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output toward the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b is started, and each terminal 81a, It is possible to output information associated with 81b to the hall computer HC.

  On the other hand, when it is not any jackpot result, that is, when the result of special loss is triggered, “1” is set only in the second unit area 122 in step S1303. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output toward the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81b is stopped. This can be performed on the computer HC.

  After executing the process of step S1302 or step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, after setting “1” in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d in step S1305, this external output The setting process ends. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81c is stopped. This can be performed on the computer HC.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1306, the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability winning result B, an unspecified high-probability winning result B, or an explicit high-probable winning result A. Then, it is determined whether the result is either the explicit high probability hit result B or the explicit high probability hit result C. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, in step S1307, an output delay flag is set in the RAM 94, and “12950” is set in the delay timer counter DT provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the external output setting process is terminated.

  The output delay flag is information for the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 to recognize that the start of external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is delayed. In addition, the delay timer counter DT is a counter for the MPU 92 to grasp at which timing the start of the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is delayed. Since the numerical information set in the delay timer counter DT is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started, the delay time (delay period) set in step S1307. Is 25.9 sec. This time is the same as or substantially the same as the time required from the start timing to the end of the common section in the pattern A to pattern C open / close execution mode. The effect by this is demonstrated in detail later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1306, it is determined in step S1308 whether or not the game result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result. If the result is a special deviation result, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If the result is not a special outlier result, that is, if the result is a low likelihood hit result A or an implicit high likelihood hit result A, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94. Then, it is determined whether or not a game result that triggers the opening / closing execution mode is obtained in a situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high-frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting process is terminated after executing the process of step S1307 already described. If a negative determination is made in step S1309, the external output setting process is performed as it is. Exit.

<External output setting process for delay>
Next, delay external output setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1401, it is determined whether an output delay flag is set in the RAM 94 or not. If the output delay flag is not set, the external output setting process is terminated as it is. If the output delay flag is set, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the numerical information of the delay timer counter DT is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the delay time has elapsed. If the delay timer counter DT is not “0”, the external output setting process is terminated. If the delay timer counter DT is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, “1” is set in the third unit area 123 corresponding to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the external output buffer 94d. As a result, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started, and the output of the information associated with the terminal 81c is stopped. This can be performed on the computer HC. Thereafter, in step S1404, the output delay flag set in the RAM 94 is cleared, and the external output setting process is terminated.

<External output release processing>
Next, the external output cancellation process executed in step S413 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14) will be described.

  In the external output cancellation process, a process of setting information of the first unit area 121 to the third unit area 123 in the external output buffer 94d to “0” is executed. Thereby, when the signal output toward the external terminal 81a for jackpot is performed, or when the signal output toward the external terminal 81b for the open / close execution mode is performed, the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is output. When the signal output is directed, the signal output is stopped in the external output process (step S201) of the next normal process (FIG. 12).

  Here, the external output cancellation process is executed in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14) as described above, and the fluctuation start process is executed when a new game round is started. That is, a state in which signal output is directed to the external terminal 81a for jackpot, a state in which signal output is directed to the external terminal 81b for opening / closing execution mode, and an external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot The state in which the directed signal output is performed is not canceled when the corresponding opening / closing execution mode ends, but is released when the first game round is started after the opening / closing execution mode. By releasing as described above, it is possible to secure a long signal output period from each of the external terminals 81a to 81c. Moreover, since it is canceled when the first game round is started, the signal output period can be secured within a range that does not cause a problem in managing the pachinko machine 10.

  Note that the release timing is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured to be released when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and before or after a predetermined period with reference to the opening / closing execution mode end timing. It is good also as a structure canceled.

<Support mode external output setting processing>
Next, the external output setting process in the support mode executed in step S905 and step S915 of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode (FIG. 19) will be described.

  In the external output setting process in the support mode, a process of setting the information of the fourth unit area 124 in the external output buffer 94d to “1” is executed. Thereby, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output toward the support mode external terminal 81d is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81d is transferred to the hall computer. This can be done for HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the support mode is executed is the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The state where “1” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is canceled by the external output canceling process (step S516) in the support mode in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 15). In the external output release processing, when the game result that triggered the transition to the current open / close execution mode is any jackpot result, the state where “1” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is released, If the result is an outlier, the cancellation is not performed. Thus, when the operation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode based on any of the jackpot results, the signal output to the port mode external terminal 81d is stopped when the opening / closing execution mode ends. However, since the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S517 is executed immediately after step S516, when the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, it is immediately directed to the external terminal 81d for the support mode. Signal output is started.

  In addition to the above case, the state where “4” is set in the fourth unit area 124 is when the high-frequency support mode is continued for 100 game times and then the low-frequency support mode is entered. Is also released.

  Incidentally, the external output setting process for the number of games is executed in step S310 of the game times control process (FIG. 13). In the external output setting process for the number of games, processing for setting the information of the fifth unit area 125 in the external output buffer 94d to “1” is executed. Thereby, in the next external output process (step S201) of the normal process (FIG. 12), signal output to the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, and the output of information associated with the terminal 81e is sent to the hall computer. This can be done for HC. In this case, the timing at which the external output setting process for the number of games is executed is the timing at which the game times end. Further, the state where “1” is set in the fifth unit area 125 is canceled by the external output canceling process in step S413.

<Regarding processing related to external output executed by hall computer HC>
Next, processing executed by the hall computer HC in response to an external output from the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  As already described, the hall computer HC is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 through the electrical wiring group EL1. For details of the electrical connection, as shown in FIG. 28, the electrical wiring group EL1 has six electrical wirings individually. On the other hand, the external terminal plate 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with eight external terminals 81a to 81h as shown in FIG. That is, the signal path between one pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer HC is smaller than the number of external terminals 81 a to 81 h provided in the pachinko machine 10.

  In this case, the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c are partly provided for external output during the open / close execution mode. Although overlapping, the other external terminals 81d to 81h have no correlation with the contents of the external output and are independent. Therefore, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is introduced without renovating the conventional equipment, any one of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is any one. It is considered that the electrical connection is made by selecting. In addition, even in a game hall that can provide the same number of signal paths as the number of external terminals 81a to 81h by refurbishing a conventional facility, the data counter DC displays the number of executions of a predetermined opening / closing execution mode. It is necessary to select a terminal that reflects information on the second display portion DC2 from the external terminal 81a for jackpot, the external terminal 81b for opening / closing execution mode, and the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot. However, the same management process is executed in the hall computer HC regardless of which terminal is selected.

  Hereinafter, the management process executed by the hall computer HC will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is periodically started at a relatively short cycle of 1 msec.

  First, in step S1501, the management target counter provided in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC is updated. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is changed from the previous time. In subsequent step S1502, it is determined whether or not reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal from the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time has been started. In this case, in the electrical wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC, electrical wiring connected to any one of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is determined in advance. In step S1502, it is determined whether reception of a signal is started through the electrical wiring.

  When the “signal reception” always rises from LOW to HI, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the signal has risen, and the “signal reception” always changes from HI to LOW. In the case of falling, it may be determined whether or not this signal has fallen.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, information on the date and time when reception of the open / close execution mode signal is started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203 in step S1503. In a succeeding step S1504, a control start process of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the second display unit DC2 is controlled to be added so that the number information of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is incremented, and after the addition Is displayed in a blinking manner to notify the player or the game hall manager that the player is in the opening / closing execution mode. Note that the notification mode is arbitrary. For example, when the data counter DC is provided with a light emitting unit other than the first display unit DC1 and the second display unit DC2, the light emitting unit is set in a light emitting state or in a blinking state. It is good also as a structure.

  When a negative determination is made in step S1502 or after execution of the process of step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal has been completed for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If “signal reception” always rises from LOW to HI, it is determined whether or not reception of the open / close execution mode system signal has been completed depending on whether a fall from HI to LOW has occurred. If the “signal reception” always falls from HI to LOW, whether or not the reception of the open / close execution mode system signal is completed depending on whether or not the rise from LOW to HI has occurred. Can be determined.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, in step S1506, the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time when reception of the open / close execution mode system signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is completed. In a succeeding step S1507, a control end process of the second display unit is executed. Specifically, the display control of the second display unit DC2 is performed so that the number of times information continues to be displayed in a state where the blinking display of the second display unit DC2 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is finished. To do.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1505 or after execution of the processing in step S1507, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, it is determined whether or not the reception of the support mode signal has started for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. In this case, it is determined whether or not signal reception is started through the electrical wiring connected to the support mode external terminal 81d in the electrical wiring group EL1 of the hall computer HC.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S 1508, in step S 1509, the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time when reception of the support mode system signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is started. In the following step S1510, it is determined whether or not it is immediately after the reception of the opening / closing execution mode system signal for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1510, a support mode notification start process is executed in step S1511.

  In the notification start process of the support mode system, notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time is started. For example, the number of times displayed on the first display unit DC1 may be displayed in a blinking manner, or a dedicated light emitting unit may be displayed in a blinking manner or displayed in a blinking manner. Further, as described above, the notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is being performed is executed on condition that the support mode system signal is received while the switching execution mode system signal is being received. That is, the notification indicating that the high-frequency support mode is in progress is made by receiving the support mode system signal in a state where the hall computer HC recognizes that it is in the open / close execution mode or after the open / close execution mode. Be started.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1508, a negative determination is made in step S1510, or after the processing in step S1511 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1512, and other external outputs are output for the pachinko machine 10 to be managed this time. The process corresponding to is executed. For example, when the reception of the support mode system signal is completed, the RAM 203 stores information on the date and time when the reception of the support mode system signal for the currently managed pachinko machine 10 is completed, and is in the high frequency support mode. The notification indicating this is terminated.

  For example, when reception of a signal from the external terminal 81e for the number of games is started, 1 is added to the number information of the first display unit DC1 in the data counter DC corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 to be managed. Thus, the display of the first display unit DC1 is controlled. In addition, when reception of a signal from the external terminal 81g corresponding to information output indicating that a predetermined number of game balls have been paid out is started, the predetermined number of pachinko machines 10 to be managed this time is stored in the RAM 203. The information indicating that the game ball is paid out is stored along with the date and time information. After executing the process of step S1512, the management process ends.

<External output execution timing>
Next, the execution timing of the external output will be described in correspondence with the difference in the opening / closing execution mode pattern.

  First, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D is executed based on the low-accuracy big hit result C or the most advantageous big hit result will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 33A shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 33B shows the open / close status of the big prize opening 32a, and FIG. FIG. 33 (d) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, FIG. 33 (d) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and FIG. FIG. 33 (f) shows an output state from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and FIG. 33 (f) is a notification indicating that the second display unit DC2 is in the open / close execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as a notification during execution). ) Execution status. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c. In the second display unit DC2, the external computer through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is externally connected. A case where the output status is reflected will be described.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t2, and an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. Further, signal output from the main controller 71 is started for all of the jackpot external terminal 81a, the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, and the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is started and a round start command is transmitted. Further, when the condition for ending the 1R round game is satisfied at the timing of t4, the special winning opening 32a is closed and a round end command is transmitted. In this case, the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner that allows the maximum number of round games to be won.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner is repeated, and at the timing t5, which is the timing when the round game of the 15R ends, counting of the waiting time for ending is started and the main controller 71 The ending effect is started when the ending command is transmitted from. Then, at the timing of t6, when the waiting time for ending elapses, a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main controller 71, and a new game round is started. Further, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern D in which the grand prize opening 32a is opened for a long time from the 1R round game, the external from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode. By starting the output and continuing until the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode, the external output is continued during the period in which the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner. As a result, during the period in which a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, the external output is continued, and the hall computer indicates that the payment of the large amount of game balls is through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. It can be recognized in HC. That is, by confirming the management data created in the RAM 203 of the hall computer HC, it is possible to grasp whether a large amount of game balls are paid out illegally or in an open / close execution mode.

  In addition, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the execution notification is being performed on the second display unit DC2, and thus whether or not a large amount of game balls are paid out is illegal or depends on the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to easily grasp whether it is a thing.

  In the game hall, for each pachinko machine 10, the nail adjustment of the game area may be performed by grasping the number of prize balls per unit time. In this case, by making it possible to identify in the management data of the hall computer HC whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode in which a large amount of game balls are paid out, the situation where game balls are likely to be paid out and game balls are paid out. It becomes possible to grasp the number of prize balls per unit time for each of the situations that are unlikely to occur, and the nail adjustment can be performed satisfactorily.

  Furthermore, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a shifts from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the opening / closing execution mode, the electric accessory 34a is likely to be in an open state, and a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 34. Is likely to occur. In this case, as described above, external output is performed to the hall computer HC, and further notification is made during execution in the second display unit DC2, so that the winning to the lower working port 34 frequently occurs. It is possible to grasp whether the password is legitimate or fraudulent.

  Next, with respect to the case where the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is executed based on the low likelihood jackpot result A or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode, FIG. This will be described with reference to the timing chart of B). 33 (a) to 33 (f) are as described above, and the hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and the second display unit DC2 The point of the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is also reflected in the same manner as in FIG.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t2, and an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is started when the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed. . Further, since the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is not performed, notification during execution in the second display unit DC2 is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is opened and closed in a short time mode. In this case, transmission of a round start command and transmission of a round end command are performed at relatively short intervals.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated, and counting of the waiting time for ending is started at the timing t4, which is the timing when the round game of the 15R ends. Then, at the timing of t5, when the waiting time for ending elapses, a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main control device 71, and a new game time is started. In this case, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b is terminated.

  Here, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the result of the special failure, the round start command and the round end command are not transmitted from the timing t3 to the timing t4. Although the signal output of the main controller 71 to the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode is performed but the signal output of the main controller 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a is not performed, other switching operations are performed. The mode in the execution mode is common to the case of FIG. Furthermore, when the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed, the effect A1 including the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is executed. As already described, when the low probability support mode A, the non-explicit high probability maximum result A, or the special outlier result in the low frequency support mode, the low frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode. In the configuration, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is performed in such a situation by predicting which game result is triggered or which is set to the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode. The purpose is to increase. Under such circumstances, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed, so that the effect of setting the game to be predicted as described above disappears depending on the situation of the external output. You can avoid letting it go.

  Further, in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, the opening of the big winning opening 32a is performed in a short time mode that does not substantially generate a winning, and a large amount of game balls are paid out during the pattern A opening / closing execution mode. If so, it is clearly a fraud. Then, during the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem regarding unauthorized monitoring even if the hall computer HC does not know that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpots in which no external output is performed during the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, there is no problem regarding unauthorized monitoring. In addition, there is no problem with management for the purpose of adjusting the nails of the pachinko machine 10.

  Furthermore, in the situation where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low frequency support mode, since the low frequency support mode is maintained after the opening / closing execution mode ends, when the pattern A is switched to the open / close execution mode, There is no problem with respect to monitoring whether the situation where the winning to the lower operating port 34 frequently occurs is normal or fraudulent.

  Next, a case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed based on the fact that the explicit high probability winning result A is obtained will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  34A shows the output status of commands from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 34B shows the open / close status of the big prize opening 32a, and FIG. The execution effect of the common effect executed in common in the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C is shown, and FIG. 34 (d) is the determined effect indicating that the execution result is the explicit high probability hit result A. FIG. 34 (e) shows the output status from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, and FIG. 34 (f) shows the main control device 71 to the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b. 34 (g) shows the output status from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and FIG. 34 (h) shows the execution status of the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2. Indicates. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c. In the second display unit DC2, the external computer through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is externally connected. A case where the output status is reflected will be described.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t <b> 2, and the common effect is started as the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, the signal output from the main control device 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, but the signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not performed. . Further, since the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is not performed, notification during execution in the second display unit DC2 is not performed. However, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A this time, unlike the case of FIG. 33B, a delay time is set to delay the output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the special winning opening 32a in the 1R round game is opened and closed in a short time mode. In this case, transmission of a round start command and transmission of a round end command are performed at relatively short intervals.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated, and counting of the waiting time for ending is started at the timing t4, which is the timing when the round game of the 15R ends. In this case, the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is switched from the common effect to the final effect. Thereby, as already explained, the player can grasp that the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the explicit high probability hit result A.

  Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the final effect is ended when the ending standby time elapses, and a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main control device 71 to start a new game round. Further, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

  As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in response to the explicit high-accuracy big hit result A, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional big hit is performed. . When the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low-frequency support mode, when the result is the explicit high probability hit result A and the pattern A is switched to the opening / closing execution mode, the low likelihood hit result A, the non-explicit high probability hit result A, or a special loss Unlike the case where the result is triggered, the high-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode. Under such circumstances, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c by the signal output of the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the lower operating port It is possible to monitor whether the situation where the winning to 34 frequently occurs is regular or fraudulent.

  Moreover, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at a timing in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. Accordingly, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is confirmed until the middle of the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, any game result is obtained. Since the player cannot grasp whether the game is triggered, the effect of causing the player to predict which game result is triggered when the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed is The pachinko machine 10 can be managed without disappearing.

  In particular, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not started in a situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of causing the player to predict which game result is triggered by visually recognizing the opening / closing mode and common effects of the special winning opening 32a. Can be performed.

  Even when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed when the low probability jackpot result A or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A is triggered in the situation of the high frequency support mode, after the delay time has elapsed, Then, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform well management when the high-frequency support mode is maintained in response to the jackpot winning.

  Next, the case where the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the fact that the explicit high probability winning result B is obtained will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 35A shows the output status of commands from the main controller 71 to the sound emission control device 72, FIG. 35B shows the open / close status of the big prize opening 32a, and FIG. FIG. 35 (d) shows the execution state of the definite effect indicating that it is the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, and shows the execution state of the common effect executed in common in the pattern A to pattern C opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 35 (e) shows an output situation from the main control device 71 to the jackpot external terminal 81a, FIG. 35 (f) shows an output situation from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81b for the opening / closing execution mode, FIG. 35 (g) shows the output status from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, and FIG. 35 (h) shows the execution status of the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2. The hall computer HC is electrically connected to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c among the external terminals 81a to 81c. In the second display unit DC2, the external computer through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is externally connected. A case where the output status is reflected will be described.

  When the game end effect is being executed, the game end effect is ended in response to a change end command being transmitted from the main control device 71 at the timing t1. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode is started at the timing t <b> 2, and the common effect is started as the opening command is transmitted from the main control device 71. In this case, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the jackpot external terminal 81a and the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b, but signal output to the condition jackpot external terminal 81a is not performed. Further, since the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is not performed, notification during execution in the second display unit DC2 is not performed. However, in the current pattern B open / close execution mode, unlike in the case of FIG. 33B, a delay time is set to delay the output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c.

  Thereafter, when the waiting time for the opening elapses at the timing of t3, the 1R round game is started. Here, as already explained, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B triggered by the explicit high-probability big hit result B, the prize winning opening 32a is opened 15 times in the short-time mode in the round game of the 1R, so that t3 After the timing, the opening of the special winning opening 32a in a short time mode is repeated.

  After that, at the timing of t4, the common section in which the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening 32a is common in the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C ends, and the effect in the opening / closing execution mode is changed from the common effect. Switch to final production. Thereby, as already explained, the player can grasp that this time is the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B.

  Further, when the delay time elapses at the timing, signal output from the main controller 71 is started to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c to the hall computer HC is started, the in-execution notification is started on the second display unit DC2. Incidentally, since the 1R round game ends at the timing of t4, a round end command is transmitted.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as the second round game, the special winning opening 32a is opened once in a short time mode. In this case, the round start command and the round end command are transmitted at a relatively short interval.

  After that, at the timing of t6, opening of the big winning opening 32a in the 3R round game is started and a round start command is transmitted. Further, when the condition for ending the 3R round game is satisfied at the timing of t7, the special winning opening 32a is closed and a round end command is transmitted. In this case, the special winning opening 32a is opened in a long-time manner that allows the maximum number of round games to be won.

  Thereafter, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner is repeated, and at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the 15R round game ends, counting of the ending waiting time is started, and the main controller 71 The ending effect is started when the ending command is transmitted from. Then, at the timing of t9, when the waiting time for ending elapses, a change command and a type command are transmitted from the main controller 71, and a new game time is started. Further, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminals 81a to 81c is terminated. Then, when the signal output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is terminated, the in-execution notification in the second display unit DC2 is terminated.

  As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed, a conditional jackpot is required until the opening of the big winning opening 32a in a long-time mode in which a lot of game balls are paid out is started. The main controller 71 outputs a signal to the external terminal 81c. As a result, during the period in which a large amount of game balls are paid out through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, even if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, the large number of game balls are paid out. It is possible for the hall computer HC to recognize that this is through the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, similarly to the case of FIG. 34, it is possible to monitor whether the situation where the winning to the lower working port 34 frequently occurs is normal or fraudulent.

  Moreover, the signal output of the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at a timing in the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. Accordingly, if the pachinko machine 10 is managed through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the game hall, even if the data counter DC is confirmed until the middle of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, any pattern A The player cannot grasp which pattern of ~ pattern C. Accordingly, the effect of causing the player to predict which pattern opening / closing execution mode is being executed in the common section in which the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 32a is common to the patterns A to C is lost. The pachinko machine 10 can be managed without any problems.

  In particular, the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is not started in a situation where the common effect is being executed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of allowing the player to predict which pattern opening / closing execution mode is being executed by visually recognizing the opening / closing mode and common effects of the special winning opening 32a. Can be performed.

  When the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is executed based on the low probability winning result B or the non-explicit high probability winning result B, the large winning opening 32a in the short-time mode in the 1R and 2R eyes is executed. Although the distribution of the number of times of opening is different, the other points are the same as in the case of FIG. In the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, although the opening pattern of the 1R and 2R large winning openings 32a and the number of consecutive opening of the large winning openings 32a in a short time mode are different, the main terminals for the external terminals 81a to 81c are different. The signal output pattern from the control device 71 and the output start timing are the same as in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a game result that is a result based on both the lottery determination and the allocation lottery in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode, the setting mode of the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode A plurality of types of game results are set by differentiating a plurality of types of elements such as the setting mode of the support mode, thereby diversifying the game. In this case, the frequency with which the predetermined control mode is selected as the open / close control mode of the special winning opening 32a from the start timing in the open / close execution mode to at least the middle timing differs depending on the subsequent contents. Thereby, the player can predict the contents determined as the subsequent progress destination by confirming the state of the variable winning device 32 after the start execution mode is started. Therefore, when the player enters the opening / closing execution mode, the player does not simply digest the opening / closing execution mode, but predicts whether the contents during or after the opening / closing execution mode are desirable for the player. It is expected to digest the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the opening / closing execution modes of the patterns A to C, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a from the start timing to at least the middle timing and the opening mode of the big prize opening 32a at each time are common. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode is started, it is considered that the player plays a game while expecting that the subsequent contents become desirable at least in the common section. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a good feeling of expectation of the player when the opening / closing execution mode is started.

  In addition, in a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes having a common section, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a in a short time mode including the common section is different. Thus, when the information for performing the prediction is provided by the number of times of opening / closing the special prize opening 32a according to the same mode, the elements that the player should pay attention to when making the prediction are clear. Further, according to this configuration, the player is expected to pay attention to the variable winning device 32 from the start of the opening / closing execution mode so as not to miss the count.

  In a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes, in the common section where the number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a and the opening manner of the big prize opening 32a in each time are common, the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a short time manner is repeatedly executed. Thereby, it is possible to change the state of the variable prize winning device 32 in the common section as compared with the configuration in which only one opening of the big prize opening 32a is continued in the common section while providing commonality in the common section. It becomes. Further, it is possible to give a common section while suppressing the number of balls entering the special winning opening 32a during the opening / closing execution mode from being extremely increased. In addition, the possibility that a maximum number of game balls will be won and the round game will be terminated while the grand prize opening 32a is being opened in the short time mode is reduced. It becomes easier for the player to confirm that the opening and closing is repeated a plurality of times.

  In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result, not the round number regulation mode in which a plurality of round games are set, but when an upper limit number of game balls are won for the big winning opening 32a. The open / close number regulation mode is completed in which the open / close execution mode ends regardless of the number of open / close operations of the special winning opening 32a completed so far. Further, the upper limit number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number related to the opening of the special winning opening 32a, and the number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number which is one end condition of the round game. . Thereby, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result, it is possible to make the number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a less than the upper limit number by continuing to emit the game ball in the common section. Then, by confirming this, the player can clearly understand that the game result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result. In addition, the player confirms that the open / close count has reached the upper limit even though the upper limit number of game balls has been won before the open / close count of the big prize opening 32a reaches the upper limit in the common section. Thus, it is possible to clearly grasp that the game result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is not a special outage result.

  In other words, it is possible to provide a game that predicts the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode by setting the common section, and the transition according to the entry mode of the game ball in the common section It is possible to provide a game in which the game result that triggered the game can be grasped, and to provide the player with a balanced game. Furthermore, a well-balanced game that increases the degree of attention can be provided only by the difference in the conditions of the common section.

  In the pattern A opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, the common section is composed of a plurality of round games. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, even if a large number of game ball winnings occur in the common section, the variable winning device 32 is opened over the number of round games. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result, the opening of the variable winning device 32 is always executed once, but is the variable winning device 32 executed more than that number of times? Whether or not depends on the winning mode of the game ball to the variable winning device 32. Thereby, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result and the opening / closing execution of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result are shown in the relationship between the winning mode to the variable winning device 32 and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened. It can be made different depending on the mode, and it becomes easy for the player to grasp the type of game result through the winning mode to the variable winning device 32.

  In particular, in both the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by a special loss result and the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by a jackpot result, the maximum number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened in the common section is the same. In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, one opening of the variable winning device 32 is executed in one round game. Thereby, in the common section of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed the upper limit number of times without depending on the winning manner to the variable winning device 32. Thereby, when grasping | ascertaining the game result used as the opportunity of transfer according to the winning aspect to the variable winning apparatus 32, a player shows the number of winning to the variable winning apparatus 32 and the open | release number to the variable winning apparatus 32. Since it only needs to be confirmed, elements to be noticed in grasping the game result are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In a configuration in which a premium effect is executed when a winning to the big prize opening 32a occurs in a situation where the opening of the big prize opening 32a is a short-time aspect in the first round of the round number regulation mode, from the start timing The number of times of opening / closing in the continuous short-time mode is the same, but the number of times of opening / closing in the short-time mode assigned to the 1R round game is lower in the case of the explicit high-probability result B More than in the case of B and the implicit high likelihood hit result B. As a result, the probability that the premium performance is executed in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit high-probability result B is more likely than the case where either the low-probable large win result B or the non-explicit high-probability result B is triggered. Can be increased. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B occurs, it is unclear which jackpot result is the trigger from the aspect of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode excluding the premium effect and the aspect of the big prize opening 32a. When the premier effect is performed, it is possible to predict that the possibility of the explicit high probability hit result B is relatively high.

  Furthermore, in the short time mode from the start timing to the 8th time, no prize is generated in the big prize opening 32a, and the premium is based on the fact that the winning in the big prize port 32a is generated in the short time mode after the ninth time. A player who has confirmed that the performance has been performed can clearly recognize that the currently executed opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the execution of the explicit high-accuracy big hit result B.

  In order to enable management of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall computer HC of the game hall, in the configuration in which external output is made from the external terminal board 81 at the time of transition of the gaming state, etc., the external terminal board for conditional jackpots is connected to the external terminal board 81 81c is provided, and external output is not performed from the external terminal 81c in the common section. Thereby, even if the data counter DC is confirmed in the common section, the player cannot grasp the type of the open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that has triggered the transition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of setting the common section.

  Further, in the common section, a common effect is executed as a low identification effect so that the player cannot grasp the type of opening / closing execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition. As a result, the effect of setting the common section can be further increased, and the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be increased. In this case, external output is not performed from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in a situation where the common effect is being executed. Thereby, even if the data counter DC is confirmed in the situation where the common effect is being executed, the player cannot grasp the type of the open / close execution mode being executed or the game result that has triggered the transition. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be managed without losing the effect of performing the common performance.

  Here, in the case of a special losing result, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which payout of the game ball can not be substantially expected is executed, and after the execution of the opening / closing execution mode, before the execution of the opening / closing execution mode. Return to gaming state. That is, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special loss result is executed for production, and does not substantially contribute to the player's profit. Then, reflecting the number of times of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the special outage result in the number information of the second display unit DC2 of the data counter DC means that the selection of the pachinko machine 10 in which the player plays the game is the second display unit. It is not preferable for a player who wants to confirm the contents of DC2. On the other hand, when the opening / closing execution mode transition triggered by the special outage result is not output externally, and when the opening / closing execution mode transition triggered by the jackpot result is output externally, the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed. By confirming the data counter DC in such a case, it is possible to clearly grasp whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result. In this case, the effect of setting the special outage result as the game result is lost. Under such circumstances, opening / closing execution triggered by the jackpot result is provided by providing the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot as described above and not performing external output related to execution of the opening / closing execution mode in the common section. While the execution of the mode can be managed, the effect of setting the special outlier result can be suitably obtained.

  In the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, external output from the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started before the common section elapses and the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. The Thereby, it is possible to satisfactorily manage the period during which a large amount of game balls are paid out during the opening / closing execution mode, while not losing the effect of setting the common section.

  When the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A, from the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot until the common section elapses and the gaming state of the high-frequency support mode is started. Starts external output. Thereby, while not losing the effect of setting the common section, the management of the winning frequency to the lower operating port 34, the monitoring of the act of attempting to open the electric accessory 34a illegally, etc. are performed satisfactorily. be able to.

  Since the external terminal 81d for support mode is provided separately from the external terminals 81a to 81c of the open / close execution mode system, the hall computer HC shifts to the open / close execution mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. And can be recognized separately. This makes it possible to manage whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode, and manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency support mode has been performed without triggering the end of the open / close execution mode. Can be done. In such a configuration, in order to make it difficult for the player to grasp the type of open / close execution mode being executed and the game result that triggered the transition, external output is performed in any open / close execution mode. Otherwise, when the high frequency support mode is set, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, as described above, since the external output is performed in advance during the opening / closing execution mode when the high-frequency support mode is set, the management can be performed satisfactorily.

  In the low frequency support mode, when the game result is the low probability jackpot result A or the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A and the pattern A is switched to the opening / closing execution mode, no external output is triggered by the transition of the game state. . Thereby, in the low frequency support mode, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in response to the special outlier result, the low probability big hit result A or the non-explicit high probability big hit result A, after the opening / closing execution mode However, from the data counter DC, it is not possible to grasp the game result that triggered the transition. Therefore, by setting the transition state of the gaming state as described above, not to lose the effect that it is possible to focus attention not only on the game in the opening / closing execution mode but also the game after the opening / closing execution mode, It is possible to manage the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall.

  Further, when the game balls are not substantially paid out during the opening / closing execution mode and the low-frequency support mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode, it is not necessary to perform external output during the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, even if the external output is not performed as described above, no problem occurs in the management of the pachinko machine 10.

<Another embodiment of the first embodiment>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied alone to the configuration of the first embodiment, or may be applied to the configuration of the first embodiment in a predetermined combination.

  (1) In the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the jackpot result, a configuration in which a plurality of round games are executed in the common section and the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed only once in each round game. Instead, the configuration may be such that the number of round games in the common section does not match the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed. For example, in the common section, the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed more than once within the range of at least one round game, so that the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed more frequently than the number of round games. It is good also as the composition set up.

  Even in this case, it is variable in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result by adopting a configuration in which the round game is included in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result. While the minimum number of opening / closing of the winning device 32 is defined by a plurality of times, the minimum number of times of opening / closing the variable winning device 32 is defined by one in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special outage result. In this respect, they are different. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game for grasping the type of the opening / closing execution mode and the game result that triggered the transition according to the winning mode to the variable winning device 32 in the common section.

  (2) In the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the special loss result, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32, which is one sufficient condition for ending the opening / closing execution mode, is limited to two. It may not be done and may be one. In this case, an event that the common section is shortened easily occurs in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result.

  Further, although the event is less likely to occur than in the first embodiment, the upper limit number is set in a range smaller than the upper limit number of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32, which is another sufficient condition for ending the opening and closing execution mode. Three or more may be set. In this case, the upper limit number may be set to the same number as the upper limit number set as a sufficient condition when the round game ends, or may be set to a number higher than that. .

  (3) In the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A triggered by the special loss result, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32, which is one sufficient condition for ending the opening / closing execution mode, ends the opening / closing execution mode. Instead of the configuration in which the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32, which is the other sufficient condition, is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number, the upper limit number may be set to the same number as the upper limit number. Even in this case, the common section is shortened in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special disconnection result by setting the opening continuation time in the short time mode to a time longer than that in the first embodiment. It is possible to generate an event.

  Further, the upper limit number may be set to a number greater than the upper limit number. Even in this case, the effect of the execution of the short-time mode on the game ball grant rate increases, but by setting the release duration in the short-time mode to a longer time than the first embodiment, It is possible to generate an event in which the common section is shortened in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special deviation result. Even in this configuration, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the jackpot result are the minimum number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened / closed. By making these different, it is possible to determine whether or not the game result triggered by the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A is a special outage result.

  (4) The opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result is not the opening / closing number regulation mode but the round number regulation mode in which only 1R is set, and the variable winning device 32 is won in the one round game. The upper limit number and the upper limit number of times related to opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 may be set as in the first embodiment. Even in this case, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which only one round game is set is different from the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which a plurality of round games are set. It may happen that the number of times of opening and closing is reduced.

  By the way, in this configuration, when the upper limit number of round games executed during the opening / closing execution mode is clearly notified to the player, the above effect is reduced. Even if the display unit is not provided or the upper limit number is notified, it is preferable that the player does not display a specific number but displays a pattern unrelated to the number so that the player cannot easily understand the upper limit number.

  (5) In a configuration in which a plurality of types of jackpot results are set as triggers for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, when some jackpot results are triggered, opening / closing of the big prize winning opening 32a in a short time mode is performed. The section to be repeated is composed of only one round game, and when another jackpot result is triggered, the section may include a plurality of round games. In this case, at least for the former section, the upper limit number of winnings to the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for ending the round game, is set to be equal to or less than the maximum number of opening / closing times of the variable winning device 32 executed in the section. Thus, it becomes easy to grasp which jackpot result is triggered by the relationship between the winning mode of the game ball in the section and the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened and closed.

  By the way, in this configuration, in order to make it impossible to grasp which jackpot result is triggered from the appearance of the variable winning device 32 in the entire opening / closing execution mode in a situation where the above-mentioned section is not shortened. The upper limit number of round games in both open / close execution modes may be different.

  (6) A plurality of round number regulation modes having a section in which the number of times that the grand prize winning opening 32a is opened in a short time mode is set are set, and are included in a common section between the round number regulation modes. The number of round games played may be different. Even in this case, the minimum number of times the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the short time mode is executed in the common section is different, and the winning mode to the variable winning device 32 in the common section is different. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp the type of opening / closing execution mode and the game result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, each round game has a configuration in which the upper limit number for the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition when the round game is ended, is equal to or less than the upper limit number of opening and closing of the variable winning device 32 during the round game. It is good.

  (7) In the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result, even if the upper limit number of game balls are won for the variable winning device 32 before the opening / closing frequency of the variable winning device 32 reaches the upper limit. The teaching effect may not be executed. In this case, the common effect may be simply ended in the middle and the effect for ending may be performed.

  In addition, in the final opening round in the variable prize winning device 32, when the number of game balls won for the variable prize winning device 32 reaches the upper limit number, the teaching effect is not executed but is executed even in this case. It is good also as a structure to be. The teaching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability when the execution condition is satisfied.

  (8) It is good also as a structure by which multiple types of upper limit numbers of the game balls with respect to the variable prize-winning apparatus 32 which are sufficient conditions for ending a round game are set. In this case, the upper limit number of game balls with respect to the variable winning device 32, which is a sufficient condition for terminating the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A triggered by the special loss result, is smaller than the minimum upper limit number related to the round game. It is good also as a structure set to, and it is good also as a structure set to the number smaller than the maximum thing.

  (9) In the opening / closing execution mode of the patterns A to C, instead of the configuration in which the common interval in which the opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 according to the short-time mode is continuously executed is set, any pattern is used. Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure which sets the irregular area where the opening / closing aspect of the variable prize-winning apparatus 32 is determined at random. Even in this case, since it is difficult for the player to grasp which pattern opening / closing execution mode is in the irregular section, the subsequent contents will be desirable for the player in the irregular section. It is thought that the game will be performed with expectation. However, it is preferable to set the common section as described above in order to increase the clarity of the points to be noted when playing a game while expecting the subsequent contents to be desirable for the player. In addition, as the common section, at least one of the time during the opening and the time between successive opening is slightly different, but it may be configured such that a section having a mode that is difficult to identify on the whole is set.

  Even if the irregular section is set in place of the common section as described above, the irregular section is determined according to the winning mode for the variable prize winning device 32 in the irregular section as in the first embodiment. By adopting a configuration in which there is a case where the regular section is shortened and a case in which the regular section is not shortened, or a case in which the irregular section is easily shortened and a case in which it is difficult to shorten, the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible to improve.

  (10) In a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes, an irregular period → common section → non-common section or an individual section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set. Common section → irregular section → non-common A section or an individual section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set, or a common section → non-common section or an individual section → common section corresponding to each opening / closing execution mode may be set.

  Even if it is the above structures, the irregular section and the common section may or may not be shortened depending on the winning mode for the variable winning device 32 in the irregular section or the common section. It is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game by using a configuration in which there are cases where irregular sections and common sections are easily shortened and cases where it is difficult to shorten them.

  (11) The number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a and the setting pattern of the opening mode in the opening / closing execution mode of each pattern are not limited to those in the above-described embodiment, and the functions and effects described individually in the above-described embodiment. It is optional as long as at least one of them can be played.

  Further, the upper limit number of each round game is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary as long as at least one of the operational effects individually described in the above embodiment can be achieved. . Further, the upper limit number may be different depending on the type of round number defining mode, or the upper limit number may be different between round games in the same round number defining mode.

  Further, the release mode by the short-time mode is not limited to a mode in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur, and it is a time longer than the game ball firing cycle, and the game ball firing cycle × It is good also as a structure set to the time below n (one of n = 1, 2, 3). Further, although it is possible to substantially win the variable winning device 32 by making the release duration longer than the game ball launch cycle, the release duration is the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game. It is good also as an aspect shorter than the product of, and it is good also as an aspect which is the same. Even in this case, in the situation where the big prize opening 32a is opened in a short time mode, the possibility that the upper limit number of round games will be awarded to the big prize opening 32a is reduced.

  (12) In a round game in which only the opening of the big prize opening 32a in a short time mode is performed, instead of a configuration in which the winning of the upper limit number of game balls set for the round game does not substantially occur, the upper limit It is good also as a structure which can generate | occur | produce the winning of a number of game balls. For example, the opening continuation time according to the opening mode of the big prize opening 32a executed in the round game is set to a time longer than the game ball firing cycle (for example, a range of 0.6 sec to 64 sec), and the opening continuation is further performed. The product of the time and the number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a according to the opening mode is the same as or substantially the same as the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of round games, or 1 for the product It is set as the structure which is the value of 2 times or more and less than 2 times or 1 time or more and less than 3 times. In this case, depending on the manner in which the game balls flow down in the game area, the upper limit number of game balls may or may not be won in the round game.

  Further, as in the above embodiment, a continuous multiple round game, such as the relationship between the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the low probability winning result B and the non-explicit high probability winning result B and the opening / closing execution mode in the case of the explicit high probability winning result B In the configuration in which the total number of times of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode executed in the plurality of round games is the same but the distribution of the number of times of opening / closing in each round game is different, as described above. Depending on the manner in which the game balls flow down, a configuration may be applied in which a maximum number of game balls may not be won or a winning may occur in the round game.

  Specifically, in the other opening / closing execution mode, the number of times of opening / closing in the 1R short-time mode is set higher in the other opening / closing execution mode, but the number of opening / closing times in the 2R short-time mode is set low. In addition, there is a high probability that the upper limit number of game balls will be awarded in the 1Rth in the other opening / closing execution mode, and the upper limit number of game balls is won in at least one of the 1R and 2R in the one opening / closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of occurrence is low or substantially impossible, and the winning of the upper limit number of game balls is substantially impossible in the 2R in the other opening / closing execution mode. In this case, when a winning of the upper limit number of game balls is generated in the middle of the 1R in the other opening / closing execution mode, the total number of opening / closing times in the short-time mode in the 1R and 2R in the opening / closing execution mode is Since the total number of opening / closing operations in the short-time mode in the first and second opening execution modes of the one opening / closing execution mode is smaller, the player can recognize that the opening / closing execution mode is the other opening / closing execution mode. It becomes. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the mode of predicting which game result is.

  Incidentally, the one opening / closing execution mode may correspond to the low probability winning result B, and the other opening / closing execution mode may correspond to the implicit high probability winning result B.

  (13) As a short-time mode, a plurality of types of short-time modes may be set so that the appearance operation mode of the variable prize-winning device 32 is the same although the exact opening duration time is different. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the low probability big hit result A and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special loss result, the appearance of the variable winning device 32 is the same, but in each opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a. It is good also as a structure from which the kind of short-time aspect selected differs. Moreover, you may apply such a structure about a medium time aspect and a long time aspect.

  (14) In addition to or in place of the configuration in which a plurality of types of opening manners of the big prize opening 32a are set by changing the opening continuation time, the big winning prize is obtained by changing the degree of opening of the big prize opening 32a such as half-opening or full opening. It is good also as a structure which sets the opening mode of the opening | mouth 32a in multiple types.

  (15) A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage of the gaming state that is shifted after the opening / closing execution mode is defined by the difference in the number of continuations in the high probability mode. In addition, the degree of advantage of the gaming state to be transferred after the opening / closing execution mode may not be defined by the winning / raising lottery mode, but may be defined by the presence / absence of the high-frequency support mode or the difference in the number of continuations.

  (16) Instead of a configuration in which a common combination of symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of patterns A to C is performed, any stop result is selected at random. It may be a configuration that makes it difficult to grasp whether the mode is an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a game result. In this case, the randomly selected stop result may be configured not to include an aspect in which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed on any effective line.

  (17) Instead of the configuration in which the same common effect is always executed in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, any one of a plurality of types of effects may be executed. In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be executed completely randomly.

  (18) One winning to the big prize opening 32a occurs in a situation where the execution condition of the premium effect is the first round of the round number regulation mode and the opening style of the big prize opening 32a is a short time aspect. The execution condition may be that a plurality of winnings are generated instead of the above-described configuration, and the execution condition may be that a lottery is executed in response to winning in the big winning opening 32a in the situation. . Further, as a condition for executing the premium effect, a condition that the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode may be added. In this case, the premium effect is an effect indicating that the high probability mode is confirmed. In addition, the execution mode of the premium effect is arbitrary. For example, the design display device 41 does not execute the effect, but the display lamp unit 58 or the speaker unit 59 may execute the effect.

  In addition, the combination of the low probability hit result B and the non-explicit high probability hit result B and the explicit high probability hit result B are not different in the number of times of opening and closing in the first round of the round number regulation mode, but the low likelihood hit result B The number of times of opening and closing may be different for the non-explicit high probability hit result B.

  (19) The combination of the pattern of each opening / closing execution mode and the pattern of the game state setting mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary. For example, in the case of a special deviation result, an opening / closing execution mode that is the same as or similar to any of the patterns B and C may be executed.

  (20) In the above embodiment, when the game result is the low probability winning result A, when the situation resulting in the game result is the low frequency support mode, after the opening / closing execution mode, the game number of the end reference number is Although it was set as the structure which does not transfer to the high frequency support mode which continues until it is digested, it is not limited to this, Even if it is a low frequency support mode, it is the high frequency which continues until the game number of end reference times is digested It is good also as a structure which transfers to support mode. In this case, a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the special loss result occurs in the case of any jackpot result in relation to the special loss result.

  In addition, when the low probability big hit result A is obtained, instead of opening the big winning opening 32a in the short-time mode in the above embodiment, the product time of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number during the round game, It is good also as a structure by which the big prize opening 32a is open | released over the same, substantially the same, or the same time. Even in this case, if any jackpot result is obtained, a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the special loss result occurs.

  By the way, as the opening / closing execution mode when the non-explicit high-accuracy big hit result A is obtained, or as the open / close execution mode when another non-explicit high-precision big hit result is obtained, it is the same as the case where the low-accuracy big hit result A It is good also as a structure by which the aspect which becomes the same in the appearance of the operation | movement of the variable winning apparatus 32 is set. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which is easy to generate | occur | produce in the condition where these jackpot results are in high frequency support mode or in high frequency support mode, and are high probability mode. For example, in the configuration in which the holding information acquired for the occurrence of a prize is distinguished between the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 and the allocation destination of the jackpot result is different, the holding related to the upper operating port 33 is held. In the information, each of the jackpot results may not be set as the allocation destination, and in the hold information related to the lower operation port 34, each of the jackpot results may be set as the allocation destination. In this configuration, the upper limit number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode that is executed in common when the low probability winning result A and the non-explicit high probability winning result are obtained is smaller than in other opening / closing execution modes such as pattern D. (For example, the upper limit number is 2 times).

  It should be noted that the upper limit number during the round game is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary. For example, when the upper limit number is 10, the opening time of the big prize opening 32a when opening according to the above aspect Is 6 seconds.

  (21) There may be a configuration in which there is no common section between the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A and the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, and the operation of the variable winning device 32 is totally different. However, if the low-accuracy big hit result A, the non-explicit high-precision big hit result A, the explicit high-precision big hit result A, and the special outlier result, the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is executed, When the opening / closing execution mode A is executed, the player plays a game while expecting that the game result is advantageous to him.

  (22) The upper limit number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode may be notified. Even if the notification is made, in the configuration of the above embodiment, since the upper limit number of round games in the round number regulation mode corresponding to the jackpot result is the same, it is difficult to grasp which jackpot result is triggered. can do.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of round games is notified as described above, the round number regulation mode is executed even in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the special winning result or the jackpot result that causes the same transition of the gaming state. Even if the above notification is made, it is difficult to grasp which game result is triggered by making the upper limit number of round games the same as other round number regulation modes. It can be.

  (23) In place of the configuration in which the winning of the upper limit number of game balls to the big winning opening 32a is set as the end condition of the round game, for example, the variable winning device 32 has an end timing, A configuration in which a ball can enter the end timing when the elapsed time of the round game reaches a predetermined elapsed time, and a configuration in which the round game ends when a game ball enters the end timing It is good.

  Further, as a condition for ending the round game, for example, instead of the configuration in which the number of winnings to the variable winning device 32 and the duration are set from the start timing of the round game, for example, the round game is started and the big winning opening 32a is entered. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of winnings and the continuation time to the variable winning device 32 after the first winning is set are set as end conditions.

  Further, instead of the configuration in which the big prize opening 32a is closed at the end of the round game, a configuration in which a transition of the round game occurs with the big prize opening 32a being opened may be employed.

  (24) At least some of the plurality of types of round number regulation modes may be configured such that the upper limit number of round games is different. In this case, between the round number regulation modes in which the upper limit number of round games is different, the number of times of opening / closing the big prize opening 32a and the opening / closing mode of each time may be visually similar.

  (25) The number of stages at which the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a changes during the round game is not limited to two stages, and may be three or more stages. In addition, it may be configured such that the big prize opening 32a is always opened only once in one round game, without opening the big prize opening 32a a plurality of times during the round game.

  In addition, the variable winning device 32 can receive a game ball, although it can switch between a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won and an open state in which a game ball can be won. It may be configured to be able to switch between a state where the winning probability of the game ball flowing down the region is extremely low and a state where the winning probability of the game ball is dramatically higher than that state. Further, the variable winning device 32 is capable of winning a game ball and is expected to generate a game ball with a first probability, and a probability that a game ball will be expected to be generated in this state. It may be configured to be able to switch to a state in which a game ball winning is expected with a high second probability.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which switching of each said state is not performed through operation | movement of the opening-and-closing door 32b, but is performed through the variable prize-winning apparatus 32 itself displacing.

  (26) Although the same opening mode is executed in each opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a, a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes in which the number of opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is different may be set. For example, when the game state setting mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode is different from each other in the first game result and the second game result, any of the plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes may be selected. However, the probability of selecting the opening / closing execution mode in which the number of opening / closing operations is a specific number of opening / closing operations may be different between the case of the first game result and the case of the second game result. In this case, it is good also as a structure by which a short time aspect is selected as an opening aspect of each time the special winning opening 32a. According to the said structure, while making the content of the privilege given to a player in the opening / closing execution mode the same, substantially the same, or the same, it makes a player predict the subsequent content through the control aspect of an opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

  (27) The delay time of the signal output from the main control device 71 with respect to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot when shifting to the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that of the above embodiment.

  (27-1) For example, the delay time may be set as the time until the timing in the middle of the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, in the common section, the delay time as the timing until the middle timing in the last opening time of the special winning opening 32a or the middle timing in the waiting time between the last opening time and the immediately preceding opening time. May be configured.

  In the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may be configured to end when the delay time elapses, and after the delay time elapses, It may be configured to end before the end timing, may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, considering that the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, after the common effect is finished. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the end timing.

  (27-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. However, in order to be able to start signal output after the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is finished and before the gaming state in the high frequency support mode is started, the final opening times of the big winning opening 32a in the common section are A configuration in which signal output from the main controller 71 to the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the ending standby time elapses after the end, more specifically, during the ending standby time It is preferable that

  Moreover, in the said structure, a common production | generation is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time when a common area is complete | finished, and it is good also as a structure which is complete | finished at the timing which a common area is complete | finished, and delay time passes since the common area is complete | finished. It is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time, and a structure which is complete | finished when delay time passes, and it is good also as a structure which finishes after delay time passes. However, among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player, and the next most easily noticed is the big prize. In view of the mouth 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then a signal from the main controller 71 for the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot It is preferable that the output is started.

  (28) The delay time of the signal output from the main controller 71 with respect to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot when the pattern B is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that of the above embodiment.

  (28-1) For example, the delay time may be set as the time until the timing in the middle of the common section where the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. More specifically, in the common section, the delay time as the timing until the middle timing in the last opening time of the special winning opening 32a or the middle timing in the waiting time between the last opening time and the immediately preceding opening time. May be configured.

  In the configuration, the common effect may be configured to end before the delay time elapses, or may be configured to end when the delay time elapses, and after the delay time elapses, It may be configured to end before the end timing, may be configured to end at the timing when the common section ends, or may be configured to end after the common section ends. However, considering that the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, after the common effect is finished. Alternatively, it is preferable that the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the end timing.

  (28-2) The delay time may be set as the time until the timing after the common section in which the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 32a is common. For example, the signal output from the main control device 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c may be started after the opening of the special winning opening 32a in the long-time mode is started. However, in order to satisfactorily manage the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the long time mode, it is preferable that the signal output is started before the opening of the big prize opening 32a in the long time mode is started. Further, in order to be able to start signal output before the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long time mode is started, the long time mode after the last opening of the big winning port 32a in the common section is completed. It is preferable that the signal output from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is started before the opening of the special winning opening 32a is started.

  More specifically, the conditional jackpot is after the timing when the final opening of the big prize opening 32a in the short-time mode ends and before the timing at which the opening of the big prize port 32a in the long-time mode starts. The signal output from the main control device 71 to the external terminal 81c may be started. In particular, in the configuration in which the number of times of opening of the special winning opening 32a in the short-time mode executed from the start timing in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B is the same as that in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A, after the common section ends. It is preferable that the signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started during the waiting time until the opening of the big winning opening 32a in the long time mode is started. Incidentally, in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, a configuration in which the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened in the short-time mode executed from its start timing is the same as that in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode is the delay time as in the above embodiment. May be applied to the configuration in which is set, or may be applied to the configuration of (27-1), (27-2), or (28-1).

  Moreover, in the said structure, a common production | generation is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time when a common area is complete | finished, and it is good also as a structure which is complete | finished at the timing which a common area is complete | finished, and delay time passes since the common area is complete | finished. It is good also as a structure which is complete | finished by the time, and a structure which is complete | finished when delay time passes, and it is good also as a structure which finishes after delay time passes. However, among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player, and the next most easily noticed is the big prize. In view of the mouth 32a, the common section ends at the same time as the common effect or the common section ends after the common effect ends, and then a signal from the main controller 71 for the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot It is preferable that the output is started.

  (29) The signal output from the main controller 71 to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c is started at the timing when the common section ends in the pattern A opening / closing execution mode and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode as in the above embodiment. In this configuration, the common effect may end before the timing, or the common effect may end after the timing. However, in view of the fact that the symbol display device 41 is the most easily noticed by the player among the common section of the big prize opening 32a, the common effect of the symbol display device 41, and the data counter DC, the common effect is the same as the above timing. It is preferable to set it as the structure which complete | finishes at the same timing or the timing before it.

  (30) The delay time of signal output may be different among a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes that are targets of delay of signal output to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c. For example, as in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, in the opening / closing execution mode in which the large winning opening 32a is opened after a common section for a long period of time, the pattern A opening / closing is triggered by the explicit high probability winning result A. As in the execution mode, a configuration is conceivable in which the section in which the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is performed in a short time mode is shorter than the opening / closing execution mode in which the high frequency support mode is set after the common section. In this case, in the former opening / closing execution mode, it is preferable to perform the external output at a timing before the opening of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner, whereas in the latter opening / closing execution mode, for example, a special loss result In some cases, it is preferable to delay the external output until the ending of the opening / closing execution mode is started in order to share the operation mode with the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the above. In such a case, it is preferable to prepare a first delay time for the former opening / closing execution mode and a second delay time for the latter opening / closing execution mode.

  The delay time is not limited to the configuration in which two types are set, and may be a configuration in which three types or four or more types are set. Alternatively, the delay time may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of opening / closing execution mode to be delayed for external output, or the delay time may be set for each predetermined combination. Also good.

  (31) Even if the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot is a terminal used to output not only information indicating that it is in the open / close execution mode but also information indicating that it is in the high frequency support mode Good. For example, when the game state transition mode is the high frequency support mode after the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the external output is opened / closed when the external output is started in the middle of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode. It is good also as a structure continued after completion | finish of execution mode, and also continuing during high frequency support mode. Further, for example, in the case of a transition state of a gaming state in which the high frequency support mode is set after the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, when external output is started in the middle of the pattern A opening / closing execution mode, the external output May be continued even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and may be continued during the high-frequency support mode.

  (32) In the low probability jackpot result A and the non-explicit high probability jackpot result A, a configuration may be adopted in which external output is not performed regardless of the type of support mode when the game result is obtained. In other words, in the case of a game result that does not favorably shift the advantage of a specific factor from the disadvantage through the execution of the specific game state, or the specific game state that progresses in a mode of low expectation of granting a predetermined privilege In the case of a game result in which the degree of advantage of a specific factor cannot be shifted from disadvantageous to advantageous with respect to execution of the above, an external output may not be performed. In this configuration, even when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed in response to any of the special out-of-order result, the low likelihood hit result A and the non-explicit high probability hit result A in the high frequency support mode, It is possible to make the player predict which game result is triggered after the execution mode.

  (33) As a game state transition mode, when a low probability winning result is obtained during the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode, but when a low probability winning result is obtained during the low probability mode. May be set with a transition mode in which the low-frequency support mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, external output is performed during the open / close execution mode in the former, but external output may not be performed during the open / close execution mode in the latter.

  (34) The specific element or the specific means for changing the player's degree of advantage after the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to the configuration in the support mode, but may be the configuration in the pass / fail lottery mode.

  Also, after the opening / closing execution mode, it becomes possible to win a special winning device or it is easy for a winning to occur, and opening and closing that is advantageous to the player without going through a lottery lottery based on the occurrence of winning in the special winning device A configuration for selectively performing external output may be applied to the configuration for shifting to the execution mode. For example, a first mode in which a special winning device can be won after the opening / closing execution mode or a winning is likely to occur, and a second mode in which a special winning device cannot be won or the winning is difficult to occur after the opening / closing execution mode. In the configuration in which the mode is set, when the first mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode, external output is performed during the opening / closing execution mode, but when the second mode is entered after the opening / closing execution mode, the transition is triggered Even if the result is a jackpot result, an external output may not be performed during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the special winning device includes an advantageous opening that allows the game ball that has won the special winning device to pass through and that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs without passing through the lottery based on the passing of the game ball. A distribution path that distributes game balls that have won a prize to the special prize device and either a disadvantage or a disadvantage that does not cause a transition to the open / close execution mode even if the game balls that have won a prize can pass through Or it is good also as a structure provided with a distribution apparatus and can visually recognize the distribution aspect of the said game ball from the pachinko machine 10 front.

  (35) A mode in which the degree of expectation for giving a predetermined privilege is relatively high is the opening of the big prize opening 32a in a long-time mode, and a mode in which the degree of expectation for giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low is a short time. It is not limited to the structure which is the opening of the big winning opening 32a by an aspect, It is arbitrary.

  For example, the number of prize balls when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a is relatively large (for example, 10 to 15), and a prize ball when a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 32a. It is good also as a structure by which the small payout mode with a relatively small number (for example, 1 piece or 2 pieces) is set. In this case, for example, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B, after the section of the small payout mode has elapsed, the transition is made to the section of the multiple payout mode, and after the start of the section of the small payout mode, It is good also as a structure by which an external output is performed until a section is complete | finished or until the section of a multiple payout aspect is started.

  In addition, for example, a plurality of variable winning devices having different numbers of winning balls when a winning occurs are provided, and pattern A is opened / closed by selecting a variable winning device corresponding to the small payout mode as an opening target. The mode B may be configured, and the pattern B opening / closing execution mode may be performed by changing the opening target from a variable winning device corresponding to the small payout mode to a variable winning device corresponding to the multiple payout mode.

  (36) In the above embodiment, in order to make the hall computer HC recognize that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the main control device for the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c during the opening / closing execution mode satisfying a predetermined condition However, the present invention is not limited to this. Basically, signal output is performed from the main control device 71 to the external jack 81c for conditional jackpot, The signal output may be stopped during the opening / closing execution mode that satisfies the condition. Even with this configuration, it is possible to recognize that the hall computer HC is in the open / close execution mode. Such a signal output configuration may be applied to a support mode signal output.

  (37) The timing at which external output is started in the pattern D open / close execution mode is not limited to that in the above-described embodiment. For example, the external output is started when a predetermined waiting time has elapsed for opening. The external output may be started when the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, or the external output may be started when the opening of the first big prize opening 32a is started. Good. Further, the external output start timing is set as the external output start timing from the jackpot external terminal 81a in the pattern A to pattern C opening / closing execution mode or the external output start timing from the external terminal 81b for opening / closing execution mode. You may apply to.

  (38) As a specific configuration for delaying the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c, for example, in the switching execution mode, instead of the configuration of measuring the delay time from the start of the switching execution mode If the condition such as whether the standard number of the big winning opening 32a has been opened, opened or has been completed is determined, and the condition is satisfied, It may be configured to start external output through the terminal 81c. Even in this case, the external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c can be delayed.

  For example, in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the last short time mode included in the common section has ended, and if it has ended, the external through the external terminal 81c for conditional jackpot Alternatively, it may be configured to start the output, and instead of this, it is determined whether or not it is the timing immediately before the opening cycle in the first long-time mode is started, and if it is the timing, a conditional jackpot A configuration may be employed in which external output through the external terminal 81c is started.

  Further, for example, it is the timing when the measurement of the waiting time for ending is started in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a becomes the high-frequency support mode after the end, or the waiting time for ending Alternatively, it may be determined whether it is the timing when the measurement of the ending standby time is finished, and when it is the timing, external output through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c may be started.

  (39) The type of the opening / closing execution mode selected according to the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is performed may be different, and the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 may be different. Different types of opening / closing execution modes may be selected depending on differences in conditions that trigger the acquisition of the hold information while the hold information is acquired separately for the occurrence of the winning. In such a configuration, the time for which the common section lasts may be different between the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the first situation and the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the second situation. In this case, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 determines whether the situation is the first situation or the second situation, and passes through the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c at the timing when the corresponding delay time has elapsed. It may be configured to start signal output.

  (40) The numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 is a type for defining the gaming state after execution of the opening / closing execution mode, such as a low probability jackpot result, an unspecified high probability jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, and a most advantageous jackpot result. A lottery is performed, and a counter for selecting the opening / closing execution mode may be provided separately. In this case, in the table in which the counter is associated with the pattern of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the numerical information of the counter, the opening mode of the special winning opening 32a from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode to at least halfway timing is specified. It is good also as a structure prescribed | regulated so that the probability which becomes an aspect may differ according to the content performed after that.

  Alternatively, the jackpot type counter C2 may be omitted, and all game results may be distributed using numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Further, in place of the configuration in which the presence / absence of the special outage result is lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1, a special counter for the special outage result is separately provided to determine whether the special outage result is generated using the counter. It is good also as a structure. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the opening / closing frequency | count of the special winning opening 32a is varied and multiple types of special loss results are set. However, even in this case, in the open / close execution mode corresponding to each special loss result, the big winning opening 32a is opened in a short-time manner in the above-described embodiment or the like, so that the big winning is substantially achieved. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which no winning is made to the mouth 32a.

  In the above embodiment, the probability of a special failure result is lower in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode. Instead, the probability of the special failure result in both modes is the same or substantially the same. A certain configuration may be employed, a configuration in which the probability of a special failure result is higher in the high probability mode, or a configuration in which a special failure result does not occur in the high probability mode may be employed.

  (41) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 has priority. The structure digested may be applied, and conversely, the structure in which the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is preferentially digested may be applied.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged side by side, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, and it is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launch handle 55.

  Further, in the above configuration, the main display unit 43 is acquired based on the first display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operating port 33 and the winning of the lower operating port 34. A second display area for displaying the result of the determination of whether or not the held information is correct may be provided. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (42) A player in a case where the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 becomes a target of the success / failure determination and a case where the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 becomes a target of the success / failure determination. It is good also as a structure from which the profit which is obtained differs. For example, in the first embodiment, the game result is distributed as in the above embodiment when the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 is a target of the success / failure determination, but the lower operation is performed. In the case where the hold information related to winning in the mouth 34 is the target of the success / failure determination and the jackpot is won, the information may be distributed to either the most advantageous jackpot result or the low probability jackpot result C.

  In the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (43) The symbol display device 41 or a dedicated display may be configured to be notified that the predetermined number of execution times of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of executions of the game times, and the high frequency support mode are in progress. In this case, instead of or in addition to the configuration related to the external output in the above-described embodiment, when the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the sub-side control device (the sound emission control device 72 in the above-described embodiment) or the dedicated display A configuration in which the signal output timing to the device is delayed, or a configuration in which signal output is not performed even when the switching operation mode is shifted in a predetermined situation may be applied. Further, the first output mode in which the signal output is performed in the same manner as the external output to the jackpot external terminal 81a in the above embodiment, and the external to the open / close execution mode external terminal 81b in the above embodiment. The second output mode in which the signal output is performed in the same manner as the output mode, and the signal output is performed in the same manner as the external output mode to the conditional jackpot external terminal 81c in the embodiment. The three output modes may be stored in advance in the program of the main control device 71, and the game hall manager or the like may select any of the above output modes through operation of a predetermined manual operation unit.

  In addition, a storage device for storing the duration time of the opening / closing execution mode and the duration time of the high frequency support mode in a predetermined mode is mounted according to the signal output from the main control device 71 and other control devices. The above configuration may be applied to the configuration. The storage device is considered to be used when performing nail adjustment according to the game ball exit, and can output a signal suitable for performing management for the nail adjustment.

  (44) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 71 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 72 based on a command output from the main control device 71 The device 111 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 71, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 71. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 72 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

  (45) The device for performing the effect for game times is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for effect for game times is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (46) In the above embodiment, one game round in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main controller 71 determines whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 71 is determined is satisfied, the game is started at a timing before the timing at which the determination is actually made, and the determination is made based on the determination that the determination is made thereafter. It is good also as a structure by which the subsequent display mode, display continuation time, and stop result in a game time are determined. In this case, the main control device 71 first transmits a variation command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

  (47) In the above embodiment, a stop result corresponding to each game result is displayed on the main display unit 43. Alternatively, however, the main display unit 43 may be omitted, and any game result is displayed. However, a common stop result may be displayed on the main display unit 43, and the stop result is displayed at random on the main display unit 43, so that as a result, the display from the main display unit 43 can be changed. It is good also as a structure which cannot identify whether it is a game result of.

  (48) On the display screen G, the game result is clearly indicated separately from the symbols that are variably displayed to perform the effects for the game times (specifically, the symbols that are scroll-displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). It is good also as a structure by which the design (picture) for this is displayed. For example, on the display screen G, an explicit area corresponding to at least one of a narrower area and an edge area than the area where the effect design is displayed is displayed, and at the end of game play in this explicit area It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to a game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a lighting color pattern in one partition section or a plurality of partition sections, or may be performed by a character or pattern pattern that is difficult to identify.

  The display may be difficult to recognize except for those who are familiar with the correspondence between the display contents and the game results because the display contents are similar between the game results. In this case, while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display, the game hall manager or the like can grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-described explicit area, it may be configured such that a change display or a switching display is performed during the game times, and no display is performed during the game times, but a stop result is displayed when the game times are ended. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  (49) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The characteristic configuration of the above embodiment can be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when entering, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the content of the game in the opening / closing execution mode using the variable winning device is different from that in the first embodiment. The different configuration will be described below. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is basically omitted.

  FIG. 36A is a front view of the game board 231 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 36B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the first variable winning device 236 provided in the game board 231. 36 (c) is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the second variable winning device 237 provided on the game board 231. FIG.

  An inner rail portion 232 and an outer rail portion 233 are attached to the surface of the game board 231, and a game area is formed so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 232 and the outer rail portion 233. In addition, the inner rail portion 232 and the outer rail portion 233 constitute a guide ball 234 for a game ball to the game area, and the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism when the player rotates the launch handle 55 The guide rail 234 guides to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 234 is formed so that the exit portion thereof faces the upper center of the game area on one side of the game area. Therefore, as the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 55 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is changed from the side portion where the exit portion of the guide rail 234 is formed to the opposite side. Shift to the side of the department. Note that the exit portion of the guide rail 234 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  In a range defined as a game area on the game board 231, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed by performing router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 235, a first variable winning device 236, a second variable winning device 237, an upper working port (first starting ball unit) 238, a lower working port (second starting ball unit) 239, A through gate 241, a variable display unit 242, a main display unit 243, an accessory display unit 244, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 235, the first variable winning device 236, the second variable winning device 237, the upper operating port 238, and the lower operating port 239, it is detected that it is arranged on the back side of the game board 231. It is detected by a sensor (not shown), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In this case, when a ball enters the upper working port 238 and when a ball enters the lower working port 239, the payout of three prize balls is executed, and the ball entering the general winning port 235 is received. When it occurs, ten payouts are paid out, and when the first variable winning device 236 is entered and when the second variable winning device 237 is entered, 15 prizes are paid out. The prize ball is paid out. However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in both the operation ports 238 and 239 is larger than the number of prize balls in the upper operation port 238. It may be different. Further, for example, the number of winning balls according to the second variable winning device 237 is larger than the number of winning balls according to the first variable winning device 236, or the first variable winning device 236 is larger than the number of winning balls according to the second variable winning device 237. The number of winning balls may be different between the two variable winning devices 236 and 237, such that the number of winning balls related to the game is large.

  In addition, an out port 245 is provided at the bottom of the game board 231, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 245. In addition, a large number of nails 246 are planted on the game board 231 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are arranged.

  The upper operating port 238 and the lower operating port 239 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 231. Both the upper working port 238 and the lower working port 239 are opened upward. In addition, the two operation ports 238 and 239 are aligned in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 238 is on the upper side. The lower working port 239 is provided with an electric accessory 239a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 239a is connected to an electric combination drive unit 239b mounted on the back side of the game board 231 and is driven by the electric combination drive unit 239b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 239a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 239, and when the electric accessory 239a is in the open state, it is possible to win the lower operation port 239.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball is likely to occur in the lower operating port 239 and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 239a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 239a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 239 itself.

  The main display unit 243 and the accessory display unit 244 are provided on a decorative member 247 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 247 extends from the board surface of the game board 231 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 247 faces the window panel 57 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the front surface of the decorative member 247.

  A main display unit 243 and an accessory display unit 244 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 247. That is, the main display unit 243 and the accessory display unit 244 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 57 of the front door frame 14, and the game balls are in front of both the display units 243 and 244. It is prevented from falling.

  The main display unit 243 is based on the first result display unit 243a for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper operating port 238 and the winning at the lower operating port 239. A second result display unit 243b for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery is set. In addition to the above result display units 243a and 243b, when the main display unit 243 is in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the round game (or the open / close execution mode), the round game in the open / close execution mode is displayed. A round display section for clearly indicating the number of times may be provided.

  In the first result display unit 243a, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning to the upper working port 238 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 238 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 238 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 243a and the fluctuation display is displayed. After being stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display unit 243b, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the lower operation port 239 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower operation port 239 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower operating port 239 is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit 243b and the fluctuation display is displayed. After being stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 243 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 243 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 243, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display unit 244, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the through gate 241 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 241 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 241 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 244 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 239a provided in the lower operation port 239 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 242 is provided with a symbol display device 251 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols that are one type of symbols. The variable display unit 242 is provided with a center frame 252 so as to surround the symbol display device 251. The center frame 252 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 251, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is reduced due to the fall of the game ball is not caused. ing.

  The symbol display device 251 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 251 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  In the symbol display device 251, the symbol variation display is started based on winning in the upper working port 238 or the lower working port 239. That is, when variable display is performed on the first result display unit 243a of the main display unit 243 and when variable display is performed on the second result display unit 243b of the main display unit 243, the symbol display device 251 accordingly. Fluctuation display is performed. The display contents on the symbol display device 251 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the lower left region on the front side of the center frame 252, a first result display unit 243 a and a first holding lamp unit 253 corresponding to the symbol display device 251 are provided. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operating port 238 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp section 253 is turned on. Further, on the lower right side on the front side of the center frame 252, a second holding lamp unit 254 corresponding to the second result display unit 243 b and the symbol display device 251 is provided. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 239 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp section 254 is turned on.

  A third holding lamp unit 255 corresponding to the accessory display unit 244 is provided on the center frame 252. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 241 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of the held balls is displayed when the third holding lamp portion 255 is turned on. In addition, the structure etc. which each hold | maintain lamp part 253-255 is displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 251 may be sufficient.

  The first variable winning device 236 provided below the variable display unit 242 (that is, below the display screen G of the symbol display device 251) is the back side of the game board 231 as shown in FIG. And a first open / close door 236b for opening and closing the first big prize opening 236a.

  The first opening / closing door 236b is connected to a first variable winning drive unit 236c provided integrally as the first variable winning device 236 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the first variable winning drive unit 236c. And placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery.

  Further, the first variable winning device 236 has a winning passing portion 236d formed at a position where the game ball won in the first variable winning device 236 always passes through the first big winning port 236a. The variable winning detection sensor 236e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the winning passage portion 236d. The game balls that have won the first variable winning device 236 are individually detected by the variable winning detection sensor 236e. As the variable winning detection sensor 236e, a magnetic detection sensor is used. However, any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

  The second variable winning device 237 provided above the variable display unit 242 (that is, above the display screen G of the symbol display device 251) is the back side of the game board 231 as shown in FIG. And a second open / close door 237b for opening and closing the second large winning port 237a.

  The second opening / closing door 237b is connected to a second variable winning drive unit 237c provided integrally as the second variable winning device 237 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the second variable winning drive unit 237c. And placed in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the game ball is normally closed so that it cannot win, and the game ball can be switched to an open state in which the game ball can win when it is elected to shift to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery.

  In addition, the second variable winning device 237 has a continuation passing portion 237d formed at a position where a game ball won by the second variable winning device 237 always passes through the second large winning port 237a. The continuous winning detection sensor 237e is provided so that the detection unit exists at the position of the continuous passage unit 237d. The continuous winning detection sensor 237e individually detects the game balls won in the second variable winning device 237. In addition, although the magnetic detection sensor is used as the continuous winning detection sensor 237e, any sensor can be used as long as it can individually detect the winning of the game ball.

  Here, the positions of the first variable winning device 236 and the second variable winning device 237 in the game area will be described.

  The variable display unit 242 is arranged on the center side of the game area so that a flow area of the game ball is secured on the top, bottom, left, and right. That is, in the game area, as the flow area of the game ball, the flow area AR1 above the variable display unit 242, the flow area AR2 below the variable display unit 242, the flow area AR3 on the left of the variable display unit 242, and the variable display. A downstream area AR4 on the right side of the unit 242 exists. The center frame 252 constituting a part of the variable display unit 242 is provided at the lower part of the center frame 252 because the roof unit 256 constituting the part extending from the upper part to the left and right sides extends to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Except for the game balls introduced to the stage 257, the game balls flowing down the game area do not cross or longitudinally cross the variable display unit 242.

  As described above, the first variable winning device 236 is provided below the variable display unit 242, and this position corresponds to the downward flow area AR2. Here, each of the flow-down areas AR1 to AR4 is provided with a dispersion member for dispersing the flow direction of the game ball by collision with the game ball, and the flow direction of the game ball with the game ball. A guiding member for guiding in a predetermined direction by a collision is provided. The dispersion member includes a nail 246, and the guide member includes the roof unit 256 and a decoration member 247 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The dispersing member and the guiding member can flow down toward the first variable winning device 236 regardless of the position of the game ball launched from the game ball launching mechanism at the upper part of the game area. It is provided as follows.

  As described above, the second variable winning device 237 is provided above the variable display unit 242, and this position corresponds to the upper flow area AR1. However, this position is a position closer to the center in the horizontal direction in the upper flow-down area AR1. Therefore, the game ball that has been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 51 and started to flow from the center in the lateral direction in the upper flow-down area AR1 can flow down toward the second variable winning device 237. A game ball that has been launched from the mechanism 51 and has started to flow from the lateral end side in the upper flow-down area AR1 cannot flow down toward the second variable winning device 237.

  As described above, winning in the first variable winning device 236 can occur regardless of where the game ball starts flowing down from any position in the upper flow-down area AR1, whereas the winning to the second variable winning device 237 is performed. Winning can occur when the game ball starts to flow down from the position near the center in the lateral direction in the upper flow-down area AR1. That is, the range of the reaching position that allows the flow toward the first variable winning device 236 in the upper flow area AR1 is higher than the range of the reaching position that allows the flow toward the second variable winning device 237. Widely set.

  However, an upper operation port 238 and a lower operation port 239 are provided at a position above the first variable winning device 236 in the lower flow area AR2. Therefore, even when the game ball is being launched in the expectation of winning the first variable winning device 236, if the game ball wins the upper operation port 238 or the lower operation port 239, the first operation is performed. The 1 variable winning device 236 is not reached. In particular, when the electric accessory 239a of the lower working port 239 is in an open state, the game ball that has reached the lower flow area AR2 has a high probability of winning the lower working port 239 and wins the first variable winning device 236. The probability of doing is low. On the other hand, in the upper flow area AR1, there is no prize winning portion other than the second variable prize apparatus 237, and the game ball that has reached the position near the center in the horizontal direction in the upper flow area AR1 is the second variable prize apparatus. Easy to win 237.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 95 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 71 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening to a board box that houses the main control board 91 or the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 and a payout control device 78 provided in the main control device 71 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power source and a launch control device 79 having a function of supplying operating power, and the MPU 92 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various sensors include a variable winning detection sensor 236e provided in the first variable winning device 236, a continuous winning detection sensor 237e provided in the second variable winning device 237, and other winning detection sensors 96a to 96d. ing. In addition, the other winning detection sensors 96a to 96d are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the winning-corresponding balls such as the general winning port 235, the upper operating port 238, the lower operating port 239, and the through gate 241. A sensor is included. In the MPU 92, based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d, a winning determination (a winning determination) for each winning portion is performed. Further, in the MPU 92, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the upper working port 238 or the lower working port 239.

  A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 78, and a sound emission control device 72 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 78 based on a winning determination result for the winning-corresponding winning portion.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 72. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 72 is electrically connected to the main control device 71 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 92, a first variable winning drive unit 236c that opens and closes the first opening / closing door 236b of the first variable winning device 236, and a second opening / closing door 237b of the second variable winning device 237 is opened and closed. The second variable prize driving unit 237c, the electric combination driving unit 239b for opening and closing the electric combination 239a of the lower working port 239, the main display unit 243, and the display unit for combined use 244 are connected. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the first variable prize driving unit 236c and the second variable prize driving unit 237c so that the first grand prize winning port 236a and the second big prize winning port 237a are opened and closed. Is done. In addition, when the electric combination 239a is won, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 239b so that the electric combination 239a is opened and closed. Further, display control of the main display unit 243 is executed in the MPU 92 at each game round. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 239a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 244 is performed in the MPU 92.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply and launch control device 79, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power supply and launch control device 79. The payout control device 78 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 77 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 71.

  The power source and launch control device 79 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 91 and the payout control device 78 and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 79 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is in the OFF state, the power supply unit for power interruption is the main power supply unit. The storage holding power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 71.

  The power supply and launch control device 79 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 51, and the game ball launch mechanism 51 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launching mechanism 51 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 234 of the game board 231, a ball feeder that supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 61 a onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 234, and a drive signal is supplied from the power supply and launch control device 79 to the solenoid so that the game ball is Fired.

  The sound emission control device 72 includes a sound emission control board 101 on which the MPU 102 is mounted. The MPU 102 includes a ROM 103 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 103 is executed. A RAM 104, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 102 controls driving of the various lamp units 58, 253 to 255 and the speaker unit 59 based on the command received from the main control device 71. In addition, a command obtained as a result of analyzing these commands is transmitted to the display control device 111. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 72 is electrically connected to the display control device 111 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which an MPU 113 that is an element in which a program ROM 114 and a work RAM 115 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 116, a character ROM 117, and a video RAM 118 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 113 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 72 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 116 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 116).

  The program ROM 114 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 115 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 113, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 116 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 251. Since the VDP 116 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 116 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 116 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 113, the video RAM 118, etc., and intervenes in reading and writing data, and reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 118 from the character ROM 117 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 251.

  The character ROM 117 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 251. The character ROM 117 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 118 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 251, and the display content of the symbol display device 251 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 118.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 92 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 243, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 251, setting the display of the accessory display unit 244, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 251 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, first result display unit 243a and second result display unit 243b of main display unit 243, and Using the variation type counter CS that determines the display duration in the symbol display device 251 That. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 239a of the lower operating port 239 is set to the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 94. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer, each piece of numerical information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the RAM 94 when a winning to the upper operating port 238 or the lower operating port 239 occurs. It is stored in a reserved ball storage area 94a provided as acquisition information storage means.

  The reserved ball storage area 94a includes a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a combination of a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3, and matches the winning of a game ball to the upper working port 238. Thus, the one set of combinations is stored in time series. Specifically, in each of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, when a winning to the upper working port 238 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order. Since four storage areas are provided in this way, a maximum of four game balls winning histories to the upper working port 238 are reserved and stored. The first result display area reservation area Ra is provided with a storage area for the number of hold information in which the number of hold information stored in the area is written.

  It should be noted that the number of storable information relating to the upper working port 238 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, five or more. May be singular.

  The second result display area reservation area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each of the storage areas Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a combination of a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3, and is used for winning a game ball to the lower operation port 239. In addition, the one set of combinations is stored in time series. Specifically, in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4, when winning to the lower working port 239 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order. Since four storage areas are provided in this manner, up to four game balls winning histories to the lower operation port 239 are stored on hold. The second result display area reservation area Rb is provided with a storage area for the number of reservation information in which the number of reservation information stored in the area is written.

  Note that the number of hold information related to the lower working port 239 is not limited to four, and is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be singular.

  When the execution area AE starts the variable display of each result display section 243a, 243b, each value stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb is stored. It is an area for moving.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C <b> 4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 94 c of the RAM 94 at a timing when a game ball wins the through gate 241. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 239a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric utility 239a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with a situation in which the game ball is continuously being emitted in the same manner with respect to the game area, the electric accessory 239a of the lower working port 239 is opened per unit time. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 238 or the lower operation port 239. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 238, and the second result display unit of the RAM 94 is stored in the timing at which the game ball is won in the lower operation port 239. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 93a as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 93. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, the success / failure tables include a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 39 (a) and a high probability mode success / failure table (high) in FIG. 39 (b). Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and the jackpot random number to be a big win in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the counter C1 may be configured to include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value which is a big win, but in this pachinko machine 10, the special result (small hit result) and the normal result are given as the result. Are set. Neither special failure result nor normal failure result will trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or support mode, but the special failure result will trigger the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, while the normal failure result will switch to the opening / closing execution mode. It will not be an opportunity for transition.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 94a of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 238 or the lower operation port 239. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 94 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 238, and the second result display unit of the RAM 94 is stored in the timing at which the game ball is won in the lower operation port 239. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 93b as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 93. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, as the distribution table, the first distribution table (first distribution information group) in FIG. 40A and the second distribution table (second distribution information) in FIG. Group).

  The first allocation table is allocated to the hold information shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 238. It is a table referred when a lottery is performed. In the first distribution table, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), as a game result distribution destination, a low-accuracy result (special game result corresponding to low probability), a small-round high-accuracy result (latent height corresponding to small round) Probability result), high-accuracy result for non-explicit branch (latent high-probability result for multi-round), high-accuracy result for explicit branch (explicit high-probability result), and most advantageous result (special game result for high-probability) are set ing.

  The game results are as follows: (1) Aspects of opening / closing control of the variable winning devices 236, 237 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) Lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, (3) After the opening / closing execution mode ends There is a difference in at least one of the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 239a of the lower working port 239.

  Of these conditions, the lottery mode (2) will be described. The low-accuracy result is a game in which the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode, regardless of the lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode. It is a result. The low probability mode is continued until at least a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery. On the other hand, the high-precision result for small rounds, the high-accuracy result for implicit branch, the high-accuracy result for explicit branch, and the most advantageous result show that the lottery mode is high after the open / close execution mode regardless of the lottery mode before the open / close execution mode This is a game result set in the probability mode. The high probability mode is continued at least until a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery.

  Further, the support mode (3) will be described. The low probability result is a game result in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. Further, the small-round high-accuracy result and the non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result are game results in which the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is maintained as it is. In this case, when the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support mode is maintained until at least the big win is won in the winning / losing lottery. Further, the high-accuracy result and the most advantageous result corresponding to the explicit branch are game results in which the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode. The high-frequency support mode is maintained until at least a big win is won in the winning / losing lottery.

  The difference in the opening / closing execution mode (1) will be described in detail later.

  In the first distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low-accuracy result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the small-round high-accuracy result. “15-19” corresponds to the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, “20-24” corresponds to the high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, and “25-29” is the most advantageous result. It corresponds to.

  On the other hand, in the second allocation table, as shown in FIG. 40B, only the low-accuracy result and the most advantageous result are set as distribution destinations of game results. Among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the most advantageous result.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 251. The expected effect includes a symbol display device 251 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (designs), and the final stop result is the assigned correspondence result in a game round that is a predetermined jackpot result. In the gaming machine, in order to make the player think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to become the above-mentioned giving correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed after the display of the variable display of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 251 is started. The display state of In addition, about the assignment | correspondence corresponding | compatible result, the combination of the symbol to which the same number was attached | subjected on one of the effective lines is stopped and displayed.

  As in the first embodiment, there are two types of expectation effects: a reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of a reach display or the generation of a corresponding result at a stage before the reach display occurs. Is set.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 92 determines the display continuation time on the main display unit 243 and the symbol display continuation time on the symbol display device 251. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the main display unit 243 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 251.

<About various processes executed by main controller 71>
Next, the processing configuration in the present embodiment executed by the MPU 92 in the main controller 71 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 92 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S1601, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. In the reading process, the states of various winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d including the variable winning detection sensor 236e and the continuous winning detection sensor 237e are read, and the states of these various winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d are read. A process of determining and storing the winning detection information is executed. Further, when a winning of the game ball is detected by the winning detection sensors 236e, 237e, 96a to 96d corresponding to the generation of the winning ball, a prize for instructing the payout control device 78 to pay out the winning ball. Set the sphere command. For example, when a winning to the first variable winning device 236 is detected or when a winning to the second variable winning device 237 is detected, 15 prize balls that are a specific unit number are indicated. Set the prize ball command. In subsequent step S1602, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

  In subsequent step S1603, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 94.

  In a succeeding step S1604, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 241. In the through winning process, if the winning to the through gate 241 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 94c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S1603 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 94c. Moreover, the process for lighting the 3rd reservation lamp | ramp part 255 corresponding to the number-of-item reservation storage number with respect to the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72 is performed.

  Thereafter, after the winning process for the operation port is executed in step S1605, the timer interruption process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operation port in step S1605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start prize) in the upper working port 238. If the upper operating port 238 has been won, in step S1702, the number of hold information stored in the first result display section hold area Ra is grasped, and the grasped number is stored in the first start hold memory. Set as number RaN. Thereafter, the processing after step S1705 is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the game ball has not won the upper operation port 238, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the game ball has won (start-up winning) in the lower operation port 239. . If no prize has been won in the lower operating port 239, the main prize winning process is terminated. If the lower operating port 239 has been won, in step S1704, the number of the hold information stored in the second result display portion holding area Rb is grasped, and the grasped number is stored in the second start hold memory. Set as number RbN. Thereafter, the processing after step S1705 is executed.

  In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the number of start pending storage N (RaN or RbN) set in step S1702 or step S1704 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the winning process is terminated. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S1706, the corresponding start display storage number N in the result display area reservation area is updated so as to increase by one.

  In the subsequent step S1707, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S1603 are used as the first storage area in the free storage area area of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the information is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number updated in step S1706.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1603 are used for the first result display unit. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation storage number RaN updated in step S1706 is stored.

  If the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1603 are used for the second result display section. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reserved memory number RbN updated in step S1706 is stored.

  After executing the process of step S1707, the main winning process is terminated. In addition, when the process of step S1707 is performed, the process for lighting the 1st reservation lamp | ramp part 253 or the 2nd reservation lamp | ramp part 254 corresponding to the start reservation memory | storage number is performed with respect to the sound emission control apparatus 72. To do.

<Normal processing>
In the MPU 92 of the present embodiment, normal processing is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, separately from the timer interrupt processing. The flow of processing in the normal processing is the same as that in the normal processing (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment. However, the details of the processing configuration of the data setting process (step S304) and the variation start process (step S305) executed in the game times control process (FIG. 13) in step S203 are different from those in the first embodiment. Yes. Further, the details of the processing configuration of the gaming state transition processing in step S204 are different from those in the first embodiment. These processing configurations will be described below.

<Data setting process>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing data setting processing in the present embodiment.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb is “0”. When the second start reserved memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S1802 to S1806 is executed, and when the second start reserved memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S1807 to S1811.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the total number of the hold information is 1 or more. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the variable display hold information is displayed for the second result display unit 243b. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area Rb is set for use in game times regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I tried to do it. As a result, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the second result display area reservation corresponding to the lower operation port 239 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is preferentially digested.

  In the data setting process for the first result display portion, first, in step S1802, the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display portion hold area Ra is updated by 1. In the subsequent step S1803, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  After that, in step S1804, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 → the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4 → the third area Ra3.

  In the subsequent step S1805, if the second result display section flag is set in the RAM 94, it is cleared, and if it is not set, the state is maintained. The second result display part flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variable display is the first result display part 243a or the second result display part 243b.

  In the subsequent step S1806, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, the shift including the information indicating that the area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the first result display area reserved area Ra, that is, the information corresponding to the upper operating port 238. Set hour command. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. When the shift command is transmitted, the sound emission control device 72 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 253 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  In the data setting process for the second result display portion, first, in step S1807, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second result display portion hold area Rb is updated so as to be decremented by one. In a succeeding step S1808, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display section reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S1809, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1 and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as first area Rb1, third area Rb3 → second area Rb2, and fourth area Rb4 → third area Rb3.

  In subsequent step S1810, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in RAM 94, the second result display unit flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S1811, a command at the time of shifting, which is information for causing the audio light emission control device 72, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. In this case, the shift including the information indicating that the area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the second result display area reservation area Rb, that is, the information corresponding to the lower working port 239. Set hour command. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. By transmitting the shift command, the sound emission control device 72 executes a process for changing the display on the second hold lamp unit 254 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. If it is not in the high probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 39A) is read from the ROM 93 in step S1902, and if it is in the high probability mode, it is for the high probability mode in step S1903. Is read from the ROM 93 (see FIG. 39B).

  After that, in step S1904, a success / failure determination process is executed. Specifically, whether or not the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the numerical information set as the jackpot winning in the success / failure table read in step S1902 or step S1903. In addition, if it does not coincide with the jackpot numerical value information, it is determined whether or not it matches the special outlier numerical information.

  In a succeeding step S1905, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S1904 is a jackpot winning result. If it is a jackpot winning result, the process proceeds to step S1906.

  In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 94. If the second result display section flag is not set, it means that the current variation start process is being executed based on the fact that the hold information related to the upper operation port 238 has become the target of the game times. In step S1907, the first distribution table (see FIG. 40A) is read from the ROM 93. On the other hand, when the second result display portion flag is set, it means that the current variation start process is executed based on the fact that the hold information related to the lower operation port 239 is the target of the game times. Therefore, the second sorting table (see FIG. 40B) is read from the ROM 93 in step S1908.

  Thereafter, a distribution determination process is executed in step S1909. Specifically, the numerical value range in which the numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is determined in correspondence with the type of the jackpot result in the distribution table read in step S1907 or step S1908. Identify which of the following is true.

  In the subsequent step S1910, a stop result setting process for jackpot results is executed. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores in advance information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 243a or the second result display unit 243b of the main display unit 243 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The stop result table for the jackpot result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the main display unit 243 are set differently for each jackpot result type. In step S1910, the pattern is specified in step S1909. Information on the pattern mode corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 94.

  In the subsequent step S1911, a process of setting a flag in the RAM 94 according to the type of jackpot result specified in step S1909 is executed. Specifically, the low-accuracy result flag is set when the low-accuracy result is specified, and the low-round high-accuracy result flag is set when the low-round high-accuracy result is specified. If it is specified that the result is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, the implicit flag is set. If it is specified that the result is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, the explicit flag is set. When specified, the most advantageous flag is set. In the following description, whether or not the various jackpot results are determined is determined by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 94 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1905 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, it is determined in step S1912 whether the result of the success / failure determination process in step S1904 is a special loss result. If the result is a special out-going result, the process proceeds to step S1913.

  In step S1913, a stop result setting process for a special loss result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores in advance information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 243a or the second result display unit 243b of the main display unit 243 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The specified stop information table for the special loss result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result. In a succeeding step S1914, a special out flag is set in the RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S1912 that the result is not a special loss result, a stop result setting process for a normal loss result is executed in step S1915. Specifically, the ROM 93 stores in advance information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 243a or the second result display unit 243b of the main display unit 243 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The specified stop information table for the normal off result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the special loss result.

  After executing any one of steps S1911, S1914, and S1915, display continuation time (display continuation period) setting processing is executed in step S1916.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 94 is acquired. Further, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 251 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation are the most advantageous result or the low probability result. In addition, even if neither the most advantageous result nor the low-accuracy result is reached, the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is generated, not the other jackpot result or the special outlier result. If the numerical information corresponds to, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 93 and displayed. The duration information is set in a display duration counter provided in various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 93. The display duration information is set in the display duration counter. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display continuation time information when the reach is not generated is displayed as the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 238 increases as the hold information related to the upper operation port 238 is the target of the game times. When the duration time is set to be short and the hold information related to the lower operation port 239 is the target of the game times, the display continues as the number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 239 increases. The time is set to be short. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not be changed according to the number of hold information and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, special out-of-order results, out-of-reach cases, and non-reach normal out-of-reach results, a display duration table may be set individually. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  After executing the display continuation time setting process in step S1916, in step S1917, a change command and a type command are set. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on whether or not reach has occurred is not included in the command for use, the audio light emission control device 72 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the display duration time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, in the type command, information on game results includes information on low-accuracy results, information on high-accuracy results for small rounds, information on high-accuracy results for non-explicit branches, information on high-accuracy results for explicit branches, and most advantageous results. Information is included.

  The change command and type command set in step S1917 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving these commands will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S1917, in step S1918, the change in the pattern in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is selected from the first result display unit 243a and the second result display unit 243b of the main display unit 243. Start display. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 94, it is determined that the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is the first result display unit 243a, and the second result display unit flag is set. When it is set, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit 243b. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S2002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 243 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S2003 whether or not the game result of the game times ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result or special out-of-game result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current game result is a special outage result. If the result is a special deviation result, “2” is set in the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S2005. The open / close counter SOC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the total number of times of opening and closing the first big prize opening 236a of the first variable prize winning device 236 and the second big prize winning opening 237a of the second variable prize winning device 237.

  On the other hand, if it is not a special out-of-game result, that is, if it is any jackpot result, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current game result is a low-round highly accurate result. If the result is a small round high-accuracy result, “2” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94 in step S2007, and the result is a big hit result other than the small round high-accuracy result. In step S2008, “15” is set in the round counter RC. The round counter RC is a counter for the MPU 92 to specify the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, as the opening / closing execution mode, the round number regulation mode executed with a predetermined number of round games as the upper limit and the round game are not set, and the first variable winning device 236 and the second There is set an open / close number regulation mode which is ended based on the total number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 237 being the upper limit number or the winning number of game balls being the upper limit number. The round number regulation mode shifts based on any jackpot result, and the open / close number regulation mode shifts based on a special loss result. Here, the round game is (1) the elapse of a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration), and (2) the total number of game balls to the first big prize opening 236a and the second big prize opening 237a. This is a game that continues until one of the conditions in which the number of winnings reaches a predetermined upper limit number is satisfied. By the way, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing of the first big prize opening 236a or the second big prize opening 237a is performed once in one round game.

  After executing the processing of step S2005, step S2007, or step S2008, in step S2009, “1000” is set as the opening standby time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. To do. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for opening is set in step S2009 regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger. Therefore, the waiting time for opening in the opening / closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of game result that has been triggered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for the opening is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player, for example, a low-accuracy result or the most advantageous result. As described above, when some game results are triggered, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where other game results are triggered.

  After executing the process of step S2009, after setting an opening command in step S2010, the gaming state transition process is terminated. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode. The opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving the opening command will be described later.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not either the first big prize opening 236a or the second big prize opening 237a is open. If none of the big winning openings 236a, 237a is open, it is determined in step S2102 whether the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” and the value of the round counter RC is “0”. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”.

  When both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0”, or when the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. When the value of the open / close counter SOC or the value of the round counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter T is “0”, a big winning opening opening process is executed in step S2104. The special winning opening opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a special outage result. In the case of a special outage result, in step S2202, the situation in which the current big prize opening release process is activated corresponds to the game result that has been triggered as described above being the special outage result and the first release. It is determined whether or not.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, in step S2203, "8" is set as the upper limit number, which is one end condition of the open / close number regulation mode, in the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94. set. If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or after step S2203, "85" is set to the timer counter T in step S2204. As described above, the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41) is started at a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, in step S2204, 0.17 sec is set. means.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, in step S2205, “8” is set as the upper limit number that is one end condition of the round game, in the winning counter PC. In a succeeding step S2206, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a small round highly accurate result. If the result is a small round high-accuracy result, “85” is set to the timer counter T in step S2204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2206, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is currently executed is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the situation in which the current winning prize opening process is activated in step S2208 indicates that the game result that triggered the above is a low-probability result or the most advantageous result, and 1R It is determined whether it corresponds to the eye. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2208, "85" is set to the timer counter T in step S2204, and if a negative determination is made in step S2208, the timer counter T is set to " 15000 "is set. As already described, since the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 41) is started at a cycle of 2 msec, it means that 30 sec is set in step S2209. .

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2207, that is, if the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch or a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch. Advances to step S2210. In step S2210, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated is that the game result triggered by the above is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch or a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch and corresponds to the first or second R It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2210, “85” is set to the timer counter T in step S2204, and if a negative determination is made in step S2210, the timer counter T is set to “ 15000 "is set.

  After the process of step S2204 or step S2209 is executed, in step S2211, the situation where the current big prize opening release process is activated is that the game result that triggered the above is a special outage result and the second release. It is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the above-mentioned event is a low-round highly accurate result and corresponds to the 2R. Further, in step S2212, the situation where the current winning prize opening process is activated is that the game result triggered by the above is a low-accuracy result, a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, or a most advantageous result. It is determined whether it corresponds to the 2Rth.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S2211 and step S2212, in step S2213, an opening execution process for the first big prize opening 236a is executed. In the opening execution process, the first variable winning drive unit 236c is drive-controlled so that the first big winning opening 236a is in an open state. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in at least one of step S2211 and step S2212, in step S2214, an opening execution process for the second big prize opening 237a is executed. In the opening execution process, the second variable winning drive unit 237c is driven and controlled so that the second big winning opening 237a is opened. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times in the opening and closing execution mode. In this case, at each opening, either the first big prize opening 236a of the first variable prize winning device 236 or the second big prize winning opening 237a of the second variable prize winning device 237 becomes an opening target. Specifically, the second big prize opening 237a is an opening target only in the second opening when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and the first big winning opening 236a is an opening object in other opening times.

  In addition, the one opening mode of the first grand prize opening 236a or the second big prize opening 237a makes the upper limit opening time (upper limit opening period) from the opening of the big prize opening 236a, 237a to the closing different. Multiple types are set. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper limit opening time is set to 30 sec, which is a long time, and a short time set to 0.17 sec, which is a shorter time than the above long time. A mode (short-term mode) is set.

  Here, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the launch handle 55 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 51 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. Is done. In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to eight. Then, in the long-time mode among the above-described open modes, the upper limit open time that is longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the upper limit number of one round game is set. Therefore, when the first variable winning device 236 or the second variable winning device 237 is opened once in a long-time manner, once for the large winning openings 236a, 237a to be opened. It is expected that the maximum number of winnings in the round game will occur.

  On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an upper limit opening time is set that is shorter than the product of the launch period of game balls and the upper limit number of one round game, more specifically, shorter than the launch period of game balls. ing. Therefore, when the first variable prize-winning device 236 or the second variable prize-winning device 237 is opened once in a short time mode, the probability of winning the prize winnings to the big prize winning ports 236a, 237a to be opened is low. It becomes possible to suppress. By the way, when a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 236a, 237a that is opened in a short time mode, the game ball is around the big prize opening 236a, 237a that is the target of opening in the short time mode. In the situation where the launch operation is performed so as to reach, the release in the short-time mode is started, and even if a winning occurs, there is about one game ball.

  Returning to the description of the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 46), after the big winning opening opening process is executed in step S2104, the opening command is set in step S2105, and then the big winning opening opening / closing process is terminated. The release command set in step S2105 is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the voice light emission control device 72 starts to open one of the big winning openings 236a, 237a. It is recognized that

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2101 that either the first big prize opening 236a or the second big prize opening 237a is open, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2106, by determining whether or not the timer counter T is “0”, it is determined whether or not the upper limit opening time has elapsed with respect to the opening of the current prize winning openings 236a and 237a. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In step S2107, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a side of the first grand prize opening 236a or the second big prize opening 237a that is currently open. This determination is made based on the detection result of the variable winning detection sensor 236e for the first big winning opening 236a, and based on the detection result of the continuous winning detection sensor 237e for the second big winning opening 237a. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, the numerical information of the winning counter PC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2108. In a succeeding step S2109, it is determined whether or not this time is the second round of the round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “14”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2109, the continuation flag is set in step S2110 if the continuation flag is not set in the RAM 94, and the state is maintained if the continuation flag is already set. To do. Here, as already described, in the second round of the round number regulation mode, the second big prize opening 237a is an opening target. Therefore, the continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 92 to specify that a winning to the second big winning opening 237a has occurred in the second round of the round number regulation mode set to 15R.

  After executing the process of step S2110, a continuation corresponding command is set in step S2111. However, if a continuous correspondence command has already been transmitted in the same opening / closing execution mode, the continuous correspondence command is not transmitted. The continuation correspondence command set in step S2111 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Processing in the sound emission control device 72 by receiving the continuation correspondence command will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2109 or after the processing in step S2111 is executed, it is determined in step S2112 whether or not the winning counter PC is “0”. If the winning counter PC is not “0”, the main winning opening / closing process is terminated. If the winning counter PC is “0”, a closing execution process is executed in step S2113. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the corresponding variable winning drive units 236c and 237c is terminated so that the current large open mouths 236a and 237a are closed. In the subsequent step S2114, a close command is set. The closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that the special prize winning openings 236a and 237a are closed. .

  In a succeeding step S2115, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If the result is not a special outlier, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2116, and then it is determined in step S2117 whether the round counter RC is “0”. . If the round counter RC is not “0”, after setting the timer counter T to “500” in step S2118, the big prize opening opening / closing process is terminated.

  In the numerical information set in step S2118, either the first variable prize winning device 236 or the second variable prize winning device 237 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and subsequently, any of the variable prize winning devices 236, 237 is opened again. This is numerical information for the open standby time until the state is reached, and 1 sec is set in this embodiment. In this case, the numerical information for the opening standby time is the same regardless of the type of the opening / closing execution mode and regardless of the progress of the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S2115 that the game result that triggered the transition is a special outage result, or if it is determined in step S2117 that the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S 2119, “2000” is set in the timer counter T as the ending waiting time (waiting period). That is, in this embodiment, the waiting time for ending is 4 seconds. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger, the waiting time for ending is set in step S2119. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is the same in any type of opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and although the waiting time for ending is slightly different, it may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player. As described above, when some game results are triggered, the configuration may be significantly different from the case where other game results are triggered.

  After executing the process of step S2119, after setting an ending command in step S2120, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The ending command set in step S2120 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 72 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 12), and the sound emission control device 72 recognizes that the opening / closing execution mode is terminated. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2106 that the timer counter T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2121. In step S2121, a closing execution process is executed. The contents of the closing execution process are the same as in step S2114.

  In the subsequent step S2122, the number of times that the winning prize opening 236a, 237a that was the target of the closing execution process in the immediately preceding step S2121 is the 2R in the round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R. It is determined whether or not it was done. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “14”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2122, it is determined in step S2123 whether or not the continuation flag is set in the RAM 94. If the continuation flag has not been set, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated to “0” in step S2124, and after the processing of steps S2119 and S2120 already described is executed, The opening / closing process is terminated. In other words, in the round number regulation mode in which the number of round games is set to 15R, the second big prize opening 237a is opened at the second round, but the game to the second big prize opening 237a at the second round. When the winning of the ball has not occurred, the opening / closing execution mode is terminated without proceeding to the third round.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2122, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S2123, a close command is set in step S2125. The processing contents when the close command is set are the same as those in step S2115.

  In a succeeding step S2126, it is determined whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a special outage result. If it is not a special out-of-game result, that is, if the game result that triggered the above is any jackpot result, the numerical information of the round counter RC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2127. In a succeeding step S2128, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”. If the round counter RC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2118. If the round counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2119. The processing after step S2118 and the processing after step S2119 are as already described.

  If it is determined in step S2126 that the game result that triggered the above is a special outage result, the numerical information of the open / close counter SOC is updated so that 1 is subtracted in step S2129. In a succeeding step S2130, it is determined whether or not the open / close counter SOC is “0”. If the open / close counter SOC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2118. If the open / close counter SOC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2119. The processing after step S2118 and the processing after step S2119 are as already described.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 45), after executing the special winning opening / closing process in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, it is determined whether or not both the round counter RC and the open / close counter SOC are “0”. If either one is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If both are “0”, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the timer counter T is “0”, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S2014, and then the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is the most advantageous result or the explicit branch-corresponding highly accurate result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, in step S2302, the flag is set if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, and the state is maintained if it is already set. . As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode.

  In the subsequent step S2303, when the number limit flag is set in the RAM 94, the number limit flag is cleared. When the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94 and the number limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the big win result.

  In the following step S2304, if the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. In addition, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the big win result. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2301, in step S2305, is the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time a low-round high-accuracy result or an implicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result? Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, it is determined in step S2306 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 94.

  If the high-frequency support flag is set, the migration process ends after executing the processes of steps S2303 and S2304 already described. If the high frequency support flag is not set, in step S2307, if the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set, and if it is already set, the state is maintained. To do. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. In addition, this high probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the big win result. Thereafter, the migration process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, it is determined in step S2308 whether or not the game result triggered by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode executed this time is a low probability result. If a negative determination is made in step S2308, the migration process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, in step S2309, if the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 94, the high probability mode flag is cleared. As a result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode. Further, this low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the most advantageous result or any highly accurate result.

  In the subsequent step S2310, if the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 94, the flag is set. If the flag is already set, the state is maintained. As a result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, in step S2311, "100" is set to the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 94b of the RAM 94, and if the number limit flag is not set in the RAM 94 in step S2312, the flag is set. Set it and keep it if it is already set. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times that is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are consumed, both the high frequency support flag and the frequency limit flag are cleared. Switch to the low frequency support mode. Incidentally, although the detailed description is omitted, this processing is executed in the power combination support processing in step S205 in the normal processing (FIG. 12). Thereafter, the migration process ends. At the end of the transition process, the flag corresponding to the game result information set in the RAM 94 is cleared.

  As described above, when the game result of the game round becomes the most advantageous result or the explicit result corresponding to the explicit branch, the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the number of rounds is specified) regardless of the state at the time of the game round. After the completion of (mode), the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. These high probability mode and high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 251.

  Also, if the game result of a game round is a low-round high-accuracy result or a high-accuracy result that supports non-explicit branching, and if the state at the time of the game round is the high-frequency support mode, the opening / closing After the execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) is completed, the game state is shifted to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes a jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 251.

  On the other hand, when the game time is in the low frequency support mode, the game that is in the high probability mode and in the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. Transition to the state. These high-probability mode and low-frequency support mode are continued at least until the game result of the game times becomes the next jackpot result. Incidentally, in this case, after the opening / closing execution mode, an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode is not displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 251.

  In addition, when the game result of a game round becomes a low probability result, the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, regardless of the state at the time of the game round. And it shifts to the gaming state which is the high frequency support mode. In this case, the low probability mode is continued at least until the game result of the game time becomes the next jackpot result, and the high frequency support mode has digested 100 game times without the game result of the game time being the jackpot result. In case of low frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the game result of the game times becomes any of the losing results, the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode do not shift.

<About the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 72>
Next, the effect determination process executed by the MPU 102 in the sound emission control device 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the effect determination process is periodically activated by the MPU 102 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  First, in step S2401, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. If these commands have been received, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the game result of the game round started this time is the most advantageous result or the low probability result based on the contents of the type command. If the result is the most advantageous result or the low probability result, in step S2403, symbol determination processing corresponding to the type of jackpot result is executed. In the symbol determination process, if the result is the most advantageous result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd number of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. . In this case, the types of odd symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In the case of a low-accuracy result, information corresponding to a stop result in which the same even symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the result is neither the most advantageous result nor the low probability result, the game result of the game round started this time is determined based on the content of the type command in step S2404. It is determined whether the result is a jackpot result other than a certain result or a special outlier result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2404, a common symbol determination process is executed in step S2405. In the symbol determination process, a common symbol combination (specifically, predetermined on one effective line L1 to L5 is set while preventing the same symbol combination from being established on any effective line L1 to L5. Determines the information corresponding to the stop result in which “3 · 4 · 1”) is established as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like, but may be configured in advance as a specific effective line.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404, a normal determination symbol determination process is executed in step S2406. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to occurrence of outlier reach display. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of detachment symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result is determined in which the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the game times are not related to the occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the detach reach symbols is not stopped and displayed is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  After executing any one of steps S2403, S2405, and S2406, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, processing for determining the effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this case, by referring to the production table stored in advance in the ROM 93, the production duration time (production duration period) corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time is selected, and the content of the production Select. In addition, a lottery of whether or not to display a notice is also performed. The MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 and the output control of the speaker unit 59 in the current game time according to the effect pattern determined in step S2407.

  In subsequent step S2408, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S2403, step S2405, or step S2406 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S2407 are transmitted to display control apparatus 111. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 reads a data table for performing an effect for the current game play on the symbol display device 251 from the program ROM 114, and according to the data table A drawing list is output to the VDP 116 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, in the symbol display device 251, the effect for the game turn is executed according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, and the stop result determined by the MPU 102 is finally stopped and displayed. The

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401 or after the processing in step S2408 is executed, it is determined in step S2409 whether an opening command has been received. If an opening command has been received, in step S2410, the type of game result that triggered the transmission of the command is specified based on information included in the opening command.

  In the subsequent step S2411, the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the game result specified in step S2410 is executed. In this case, when the type of the game result specified in step S2410 is a special outage result or a small round highly accurate result, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the type of the game result specified above is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or an explicit result corresponding to an explicit branch, the effects A and B are selected as effects for the opening / closing execution mode and the initial execution is performed. Production A is set as the target. In addition, when the type of the identified game result is the most advantageous result, the effect C is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, when the type of the identified game result is a low probability result, the effect D is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  Incidentally, the effect A in the present embodiment corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning prize openings 236a and 237a is executed twice in a short time manner in the opening / closing execution mode, and the effect B in the present embodiment is the opening / closing execution mode. Corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the prize winning openings 236a, 237a is executed 13 times in a long time manner, and the effects C and D in this embodiment are the opening / closing of the prize winning openings 236a, 237a in the opening / closing execution mode. Corresponds to the time when is executed 15 times in a long-time manner.

  The MPU 102 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 in the current opening / closing execution mode according to the effect pattern determined in step S2411, and outputs the speaker unit 59, except for the case where the process of step S2414 described later is executed. Execute control.

  In subsequent step S 2412, an open / close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result in step S 2411 is transmitted to display control apparatus 111. Based on the received opening / closing execution mode command, the MPU 113 of the display control device 111 reads a data table for performing the current opening / closing execution mode effect on the symbol display device 251 from the program ROM 114, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 116 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72.

  Here, as already described, in any opening / closing execution mode, the second big prize opening 237a is opened upon the second opening. Therefore, in the display control device 111, when the effect A, the effect C, or the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, the second big prize opening 237a is opened at the 2Rth from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 251 is controlled to display an image corresponding to the fact that the game ball should be aimed at the second grand prize opening 237a before the 2R start. Incidentally, the notification is canceled at least by the timing when the second R ends or by a predetermined timing after that.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2409 or after the processing in step S2412 is executed, it is determined in step S2413 whether a continuation correspondence command is received. As described above, the continuation correspondence command is transmitted when a winning to the second big winning opening 237a occurs in the second round of the round number regulation mode set to 15R.

  If a continuation correspondence command has been received, a continuation correspondence effect determination process is executed in step S2414. The MPU 102 performs the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 so that the light effect corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is executed immediately after the winning of the second big winning opening 237a occurs, and also corresponds to the occurrence of the winning. Output control of the speaker unit 59 is executed so that sound is output.

  Also, if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch, in step S 2414, The effect for the opening / closing execution mode is changed from effect A to effect B. In the MPU 102, when the change from the effect A to the effect B is executed, the light emission control of the display lamp unit 58 after the end of the second opening / closing execution mode of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed according to the effect B effect pattern. The output control of the unit 59 is executed.

  In a succeeding step S2415, a continuation corresponding effect command is transmitted to the display control device 111. The MPU 113 of the display control device 111 controls the display of the symbol display device 251 so that an effect corresponding to the occurrence of the winning is performed immediately after the winning of the second big winning opening 237a occurs. Also, if the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that is being executed this time is a high-accuracy result corresponding to an implicit branch or an explicit branch-corresponding high-precision result, In order to execute the effect on the symbol display device 251, a data table for effect B is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2413, or after the processing of step S2415 is executed, other processing is executed in step S2416. In the other processing, for example, processing for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed based on reception of the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command. Thereafter, the effect determination process ends.

<About game results>
Next, the contents of various game results defined by executing the various processes described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  As shown in FIG. 50, game results set other than the normal off result in this embodiment include a special off result, a small round high-accuracy result, a non-explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result, an explicit branch compatible high-accuracy result, Advantageous results and low accuracy results.

  Among these game results, the special loss result is a game result that is selected when it is not won in the winning / losing lottery, and the various jackpot results other than the special winning result are games that are selected when winning in the winning / failing lottery It is a result. In addition, the various jackpot results are game results that serve as a transition opportunity for either the winning / failing lottery mode or the support mode, unlike the disapproval results, but the transition modes are different as shown in FIG.

  Each game result listed in FIG. 50 is a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, but the contents of the opening / closing execution mode of the transition destination are different in a predetermined combination and individually. The contents of each open / close execution mode will be described below.

  In the most advantageous result and the low-accuracy result, a transition is made to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and the first grand prize winning opening 236a is opened and closed once in a short time mode in the 1R. In the eyes, the second big prize opening 237a is opened and closed once in the long-time mode, and in each of the 3rd to 15R eyes, the first big prize port 236a is opened and closed once. In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode is also referred to as a pattern A opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment.

  Here, the first grand prize opening 236a is a winning part for continuation determination, and even if the winning of the game ball does not occur during the opening, the next round game will be continued except for the 15th round. The second grand prize opening 237a is a winning portion for continuous branching, and if the winning of a game ball does not occur during opening, the next round game is not continued. In this case, the second grand prize opening 237a is opened and closed at the 2R, but the opening mode is a long-time mode. Then, if a launch operation is performed aiming for a prize at the second big prize opening 237a, a prize will be given to the second big prize opening 237a, and opening and closing of the first big prize opening 236a after the third round will be executed. .

  By the way, the odd combination of symbols is stopped and displayed in the game times that are the most advantageous result, and the effect C is executed as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the even number of symbol combinations is stopped in the game times that are the less accurate results. The effect D is displayed as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern A is executed, the player can grasp whether the game result that is the trigger for the transition is the most advantageous result or the low probability result.

  As a result of the special losing, the mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the two big winning openings 236a and 237a are opened and closed in a short time manner. In this case, the first big prize opening 236a is opened at the first opening, and the second big prize opening 237a is opened at the second opening. In addition, in the small round high-accuracy result, the mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 2 times, and the two big winning openings 236a and 237a are opened and closed in a short time manner. In this case, the first big prize opening 236a is opened at the 1Rth, and the second big prize opening 237a is opened at the 2Rth.

  That is, when comparing the special out-of-game result and the low-round high-accuracy result, although the former is the open / closed number regulation mode and the latter is the round number regulation mode, the big prize opening 236a, The manner in which 237a is opened and closed is common. In addition, in both the game times that result in a special loss result and the game times that result in a small round of high accuracy, the symbol display device 251 stops and displays a common symbol combination, and an effect during the opening / closing execution mode is also produced. In common. Furthermore, the support mode is maintained as the previous support mode in both the special off-track result and the small round high-accuracy result. Therefore, if the game result is a special out-of-game result or a small round high-accuracy result, the player predicts whether or not the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode or the transition to the lottery mode does not occur. You can play games.

  In the following description, the opening / closing execution mode executed in the case of the special out-of-range result and the small round high-accuracy result is also referred to as the pattern B opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment.

  In the non-explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result and the explicit branch-corresponding high-accuracy result, the round number regulation mode is performed in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of 15 times, and the mode shifts to the pattern C opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment. Here, the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is common to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B in the same manner as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B in the opening manner of the variable winning devices 236, 237 up to the 2R, and is variable from the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B depending on the progress. The opening mode of the winning devices 236 and 237 is similar in appearance. The state of the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C will be described in detail with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 51 in addition to FIG.

  FIG. 51 (a) shows the opening status of the first big prize opening 236a, FIG. 51 (b) shows the opening situation of the second big winning opening 237a, and FIG. 51 (c) shows the opening to the second big prize opening 237a. Indicates whether there is a prize. 51A and 51B show the state of the pattern C opening / closing execution mode in this embodiment, and FIG. 51C shows the state of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode in this embodiment. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, the first big prize opening 236a is opened once in the short-time mode at the 1R time, and the second big prize opening 237a is opened in the short-time mode at the 2R time. It is done once. The 1R and 2R opening modes are common to the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. In addition, in both of the game times that are the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch and the game times that are the high-accuracy result that corresponds to the explicit branch, the common symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 251. This combination is common to the game times that result in special outliers and the game times that result in high accuracy results of a small round. Furthermore, the effect until the end of the second R in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is effect A, which is the same as in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode.

  With the above configuration, the player can open the first big prize opening 236a once in a short time mode from the start of the opening / closing execution mode and open the second big prize port 237a in a short time mode once. At the performed timing, it is not possible to determine whether the open / close execution mode currently being executed is the pattern B or the pattern C from the aspects of the variable winning devices 236 and 237 and the symbol display device 251. Similarly, at the timing described above, from the aspects of the variable winning devices 236, 237 and the symbol display device 251, the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is a special outage result, a small round high-accuracy result, an implicit branch. It cannot be determined whether the corresponding highly accurate result or the explicit branch-corresponding highly accurate result. Therefore, the player digests the opening / closing execution mode while predicting which game result is at least until the timing described above.

  Further, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, as shown in FIG. 50, the first big prize opening 236a is opened at the 1R and 3R to 15R, and the second big prize opening 237a is opened at the 2R. Is done. In this case, the first big prize opening 236a is a winning part for continuation determination, and even if the winning of the game ball does not occur during the opening, the next round game will be continued except for the 15th round. The second big prize opening 237a is a winning part for continuous branching, and if the winning of the game ball does not occur during opening, the next round game is not continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), when a winning to the second big winning opening 237a occurs in the 2R, the first big winning opening 236a is opened in the long time mode after the 3rd R. However, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), when the second big prize opening 237a has not been won in the second round, the first big prize opening 236a in the third to fifteenth rounds is not opened. .

  When the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C ends at the second R as shown in FIG. 51 (B), the opening mode of the special winning openings 236a, 237a from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is as shown in FIG. This is the same as or apparently the same as the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B shown in 51 (C). In this case, in the high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the support mode is maintained in the previous support mode, and in the high-accuracy result corresponding to the explicit branch, if the previous support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode is changed to the high-frequency support mode. If the previous support mode is the high frequency support mode, it is maintained. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, if the game result is a special outage result, a small round high accuracy result, a non-explicit branch compatible high accuracy result or an explicit branch compatible high accuracy result, even after the opening / closing execution mode ends, The player can play a game while predicting whether the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode or whether the winning / failing lottery mode does not shift. Also, if the game result in the low frequency support mode is a special result, a small round high-accuracy result, or a high-accuracy result corresponding to the implicit branch, the player will be in the lottery mode even after the open / close execution mode ends. It is possible to play a game while predicting whether the high probability mode is set or whether the success / failure lottery mode is not changed.

  On the other hand, as described above, in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, when the second big prize opening 237a occurs in the second round, as shown in FIG. 236a is opened in a long-time manner. That is, the profit obtained by the player is greatly different between the case where the second big prize opening 237a has been won and the case where it has not occurred in the second R of the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. Then, the player expects to win the second big prize opening 237a when the combination of the common symbols is stopped and displayed at the end of the game round and the opening / closing execution mode with the execution of the production A is started. However, it is considered that the game ball is fired. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 51C, even if a game ball wins in the second grand prize opening 237a in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode closes the second big prize opening 237a. It will be terminated later. Then, when a game ball wins in the second big prize opening 237a and the first big prize opening 236a is continuously opened, the player is in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. Can be recognized. When the pattern C opening / closing execution mode is executed, the subsequent lottery mode is always the high probability mode. Therefore, when a game ball wins at the second big prize opening 237a in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the first big prize opening 236a after the third round is opened as described above. Not only the profit but also the profit that it is possible to clearly recognize that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode after the execution of the opening / closing execution mode is given.

  By the way, in the opening / closing execution mode of pattern C, the first variable that is a non-branch-compatible variable pitching means is used instead of the second variable winning device 237 that is a variable pitching-means for branching in the 1R and 3R-15R. By opening the winning device 236, when the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C is executed, at least the 2Rth is surely continued, and the second variable winning device 237 is won in the 2Rth It will continue reliably until the 15th R. As a result, when shifting to the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the variable winning device 236, 237 is reliably opened a plurality of times, so that the opening / closing execution mode can be reliably continued for a certain period of time, and 2R It is possible to make the height of the profit due to the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 237 more remarkable. Furthermore, since the second variable prize-winning device 237 is to be opened only for one round game, the timing for branching the progress of the opening / closing execution mode is aggregated, and a branch is performed in each round game. Compared to the configuration, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the disappearance of the player's satisfaction of having shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the first variable winning device 236 is provided as a non-branch-compatible variable winning means, and the second variable winning device 237 is opened as a branch-corresponding variable winning device as a result of providing the second variable winning device 237 The player pays attention to the fact that a prize is awarded to the second variable prize-winning device 237, and when the first variable prize-winning device 236 is opened, the player enters the first variable prize-winning device 236. Although the degree of attention to the occurrence of the winning is slightly reduced, the player can safely use the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode while maintaining the satisfaction of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In addition, the role of one variable winning device is not switched between the role corresponding to the branching and the role corresponding to the non-branching, but the role corresponding to the branching and the role corresponding to the non-branching for each hardware configuration of the variable winning device. It is distinguished. Thereby, it is possible for the player to clearly grasp whether it is the timing to pay attention to the occurrence of winning in the variable winning devices 236 and 237 or the timing to digest the opening / closing execution mode with peace of mind. .

  In the common section common to both the pattern B opening / closing execution mode and the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the target to be opened is switched between the first variable winning device 236 and the second variable winning device 237. The switching mode is common to the pattern B and the pattern C. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode currently being executed in the common section from being identified as the pattern B or the pattern C while preventing the game in the common section from becoming monotonous.

<Another embodiment of the second embodiment>
(1) The timing at which the second variable prize-winning device 237 is opened is not limited to the second opening, and may be the first opening as long as it is other than the last opening. There may be. However, in order to increase the advantage of the subsequent opening being executed based on the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 237, the second variable winning device is at a timing ahead of the middle opening times in the opening / closing execution mode. It is preferable that 237 is an opening target.

  (2) The first release in the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern C may be configured such that the release is performed in a long-time mode or in a mode in which a maximum number of game balls can be won in a round game. In this configuration, when the pattern C is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening in the long-time mode is performed at least once, so that the player's satisfaction of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is lost. Is suppressed.

  (3) In the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, a common section for disabling identification from the pattern B is set in the 1R and 2R, but all the multiple opening operations performed in the common section are performed. You may make it perform by the 2nd variable winning apparatus 237. FIG. In this case, in the common section, even if the winning to the second variable winning device 237 does not occur in the opening times executed first, the subsequent opening times are always executed, and in the common section If a winning to the second variable winning device 237 occurs at any opening times executed, a new opening may be executed after the common section. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure a long period of time expected for the occurrence of winning in the second variable winning device 237.

  (4) In the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the second variable winning device 237 may be opened and closed a plurality of times in a round game in which the second variable winning device 237 is to be opened. In this case, if a winning to the second variable winning device 237 occurs in any open times during the round game, the subsequent round game may be executed.

  (5) When the second variable winning device 237 is opened in the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, the opening mode may be selected from a plurality of types by lottery. As the plurality of types of modes, only the long-time mode and the short-time mode may be set, or other modes may be set.

  (6) In the pattern C opening / closing execution mode, a special action that does not occur in the pattern B opening / closing execution mode occurs, based on the fact that the second variable winning device 237 has been won by the second opening in the common section. By paying attention to the effect that the player's attention to the game in each open / close execution mode can be improved by doing so, the special action may not be a new opening after that. For example, as a special operation, a special effect may be performed by an effect device such as the display lamp unit 58, the speaker unit 59, or the symbol display device 251. Further, in such a configuration in which the special action is performed by the special effect, a plurality of variable winning devices may not be provided in the game area, but a single variable winning device may be provided.

  (7) Instead of a configuration in which a combination of symbols is always stopped and displayed in the game times in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode of the pattern B and the pattern C is performed, any stop result is selected at random. It may be configured that it is difficult to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the game result.

  (8) A configuration in which any one of a plurality of types of effects is executed instead of a configuration in which the same effects for the opening / closing execution mode are always executed at the start of the pattern B opening / closing execution mode or the pattern C opening / closing execution mode. It is good. In this case, the plurality of types of effects may be executed completely at random, or the selection rate of each effect may be different depending on the game result that triggered the execution of the opening / closing execution mode.

  (9) The combination of the pattern of each opening / closing execution mode and the pattern of the game state setting mode after execution of the opening / closing execution mode is not limited to that in the above embodiment, and is arbitrary.

  (10) The jackpot type counter C2 may be omitted, and all game results may be distributed using numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, in place of the configuration in which the presence / absence of the special outage result is lottery using the jackpot random number counter C1, a special counter for the special outage result is separately provided to determine whether the special outage result is generated using the counter. It is good also as a structure. In addition, in the high probability mode compared to the low probability mode, instead of the configuration in which the probability of a special failure result is low, the probability of the special failure result in both modes may be the same or substantially the same. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of a special outlier result is higher, or a configuration in which a special outage result does not occur in the high probability mode.

  (11) The advantage of the gaming state set after the opening / closing execution mode is defined by the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, but is not limited to this. For example, the electric combination after the opening / closing execution mode A relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued in the object 239a. Further, a relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state may be set depending on the number of games in which the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is continued. Further, a relatively advantageous state and an unfavorable state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 239a enters the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode.

  (12) The hold information related to winning in the upper working port 238 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 239 may be distinguished and not stored. In addition, the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 239 is not digested preferentially, but any of the holding information related to winning in the upper working port 238 and the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 239 Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure digested in the acquisition order.

  (13) Instead of the configuration in which the display controller 111 is controlled by the sound emission controller 72 based on the command output from the main controller 71, the display control is performed based on the command output from the main controller 71. The device 111 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 72. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 71, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 71. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 71 to the sound emission control device 72 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 72 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

  (14) A device for performing a game-turn effect is not limited to the symbol display device 251, and a configuration in which a game-turn effect is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (15) Although one game turn in the main display unit 243 is started based on the determination of whether or not the main control device 71 determines whether or not, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 71 The above game times are started at a timing prior to the timing when the determination is actually made when the conditions for determining whether or not the determination is made, and the subsequent game times are determined based on the determination that the determination is made. It is good also as a structure by which a display mode, display continuation time, and a stop result are determined. In this case, the main control device 71 first transmits a variation command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the display duration, and determines the type. The configuration may be such that commands are transmitted, and the transmission timing of these time commands and type commands may be shifted.

  (16) Although the main display unit 243 displays a stop result corresponding to each game result, instead of this, the main display unit 243 may be omitted. A common stop result may be displayed on the display unit 243, and the stop result is randomly displayed on the main display unit 243. As a result, any game result is displayed from the display on the main display unit 243. It is good also as a structure which cannot identify.

  (17) On the display screen G, the game results are clearly indicated separately from the symbols that are variably displayed to produce the effects for the game times (specifically, the symbols that are scroll-displayed on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3). It is good also as a structure by which the design (picture) for this is displayed. For example, on the display screen G, an explicit area corresponding to at least one of a narrower area and an edge area than the area where the effect design is displayed is displayed, and at the end of game play in this explicit area It is good also as a structure by which the display corresponding to a game result is made. In this case, the display may be performed by a lighting color pattern in one partition section or a plurality of partition sections, or may be performed by a character or pattern pattern that is difficult to identify.

  The display may be difficult to recognize except for those who are familiar with the correspondence between the display contents and the game results because the display contents are similar between the game results. In this case, while making it difficult for the player to grasp the game result through the display, the game hall manager or the like can grasp the game result through the display. Further, in the above-described explicit area, it may be configured such that a change display or a switching display is performed during the game times, and no display is performed during the game times, but a stop result is displayed when the game times are ended. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  (18) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The characteristic configuration of the above embodiment can be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when entering, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the entry position to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the big prize opening / closing process). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
The specific gaming state (open / close) in which the variable entry control is performed based on the transition determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state Transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the execution mode);
In gaming machines equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect (long-term aspect) and the low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set to be high and low,
Execution mode (for example, opening / closing execution mode when a special outage result is obtained in the first embodiment, opening / closing execution mode when an explicit high probability hit result B is obtained in the first specific gaming state) ), When the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed, the process proceeds, and when the variable pitch control is executed for a predetermined specific number of times, the control is terminated and predetermined. A predetermined mode is also set that ends when a specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitching means,
The gaming machine, wherein the number of the specific reference number is set to be equal to or less than the number of the specific reference number.

  According to the feature A1, an effect on the rate of granting a privilege to the player is set by setting a section that is to be advanced by performing variable pitch control in a low expectation mode during a specific gaming state. It is possible to use the variable pitching means as a kind of production while suppressing the above.

  In this case, the section ends when the variable pitch control is executed for a specific reference number of times, and also ends when a specific reference number of game balls enter the variable pitching means. The number of specific reference numbers is set to be equal to or less than the number of specific reference times. As a result, when the above-described section occurs, the player continues to fire the game ball in a manner aimed at the occurrence of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, and at least 1 in each opening of the variable ball entry means. If a game ball is entered, a specific reference number of game balls will be entered, and a privilege corresponding to that will be obtained.

  In addition, the earlier the game ball enters the variable ball entry means, the smaller the number of times that the variable ball control is executed during the interval. Therefore, it is possible to provide an element of effect that the number of times of variable entry control fluctuates in association with the game ball firing mode.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

The specific game state includes a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number, and further, the round game In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game that is terminated based on execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times is set,
The high expectation mode is a mode in which the upper limit number of balls are likely to be generated in the variable ball entry means that is a control target during the period in which the variable ball control according to the mode is executed. Whereas
In the low expectation mode, during the period when the variable pitch control according to the mode is being performed, the upper limit number of game balls have not entered into the variable pitch means that is the control target, or It is good also as a structure which is an aspect which is hard to generate | occur | produce.

  In order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball from the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state May be set to a period shorter than the launch period of the game balls. Also, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is a period that is equal to or greater than the launch period of the game balls, and the launch period of the game balls × n (n is greater than the upper limit number) It is good also as a structure set to the following period. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature A2. As the specific gaming state, the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the specific game state is indistinguishable or difficult to identify in terms of the operation of the variable ball entering means. The first specific gaming state (in the first embodiment, for example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by the non-explicit high probability winning result A) and the second specific gaming state (for example, special in the first embodiment) Open / close execution mode triggered by the result of detachment)
The second specific gaming state is set so as to include a section executed according to the predetermined mode in the low identification section,
In the first specific gaming state, the number of sections executed by the predetermined mode included in the low identification section is not included in the low identification section or does not include the section executed by the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is set to be larger than in the second specific gaming state.

  According to the feature A2, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In this case, at least in the low identification section of the second specific gaming state, it is possible to shorten the section by continuing to emit the game ball, and through the occurrence of the shortening, the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state It is possible to grasp the side that is not executed in the gaming state. Thereby, the player can grasp which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not executed according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. It becomes. In other words, a game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and the game in which the specific game state on the side that is not being executed can be grasped according to the entry mode of the game ball are provided to the player in a balanced manner. In addition, it is possible to provide a well-balanced game that increases the degree of attention only by the difference in conditions of the low identification section.

Feature A3. As the specific gaming state, the variable ball entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the specific game state is indistinguishable or difficult to identify in terms of the operation of the variable ball entering means. The first specific gaming state (in the first embodiment, for example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by the non-explicit high probability winning result A) and the second specific gaming state (for example, special in the first embodiment) Open / close execution mode triggered by the result of detachment)
In the second specific game state, when the variable pitch control is executed for the specific reference number of times, the low discrimination section is ended, and the specific reference number of game balls are stored in the variable pitch means. It is set to an execution mode in which the low discrimination section ends even when entering the opening,
The first specific game state is set to an execution mode in which the low identification section does not end even if the specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitching means. A gaming machine according to A1.

  According to the feature A3, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In this case, in the low identification section in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to shorten the section by continuing to fire the game ball and generating a specific reference number of game balls. In the low identification section in the state, even if the game ball is continuously fired to generate a specific reference number of game balls, the section cannot be shortened. Thereby, the player can grasp which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not executed according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. It becomes. In other words, a game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and the game in which the specific game state on the side that is not being executed can be grasped according to the entry mode of the game ball are provided to the player in a balanced manner. In addition, it is possible to provide a well-balanced game that increases the degree of attention only by the difference in conditions of the low identification section.

Feature A4. The maximum number of times that the variable pitch control is executed in the low identification section is set to the specific reference number in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
Furthermore, the first specific game state is configured to have a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number, and the round The game is set to an execution mode that is terminated based on a predetermined upper limit number of times, and is set to an execution mode that includes a plurality of round games in the low identification section. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein:

  According to the feature A4, even when a large number of game balls enter the variable ball entry means in the low identification section in the first specific game state, the variable ball control is executed over the number of round games. On the other hand, although variable entry control is always executed once in the low identification section in the second specific gaming state, whether or not variable entry control is executed more than that is variable entry means. Depends on how the game ball enters the ball. Thereby, the relationship between the entrance mode to the variable entrance means and the number of times the variable entrance means is opened can be made different between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It becomes easier for the player to grasp the type of the specific gaming state through the entering mode.

  Feature A5. The game according to Feature A4, wherein the first specific game state is set such that one variable entry control is executed in one round game in the low identification section. Machine.

  According to the feature A5, the variable entry means is opened for a specific reference number in the low identification section of the first specific gaming state without depending on the entry mode of the game ball, whereas the second identification is performed. In the low discrimination section in the gaming state, the variable pitching means may not be released for a specific reference number of times. Thus, when grasping the type of the specific gaming state according to the manner of entering the variable entry means, the player simply confirms the number of entries to the variable entry means and the number of times the variable entry means are released. Therefore, elements to be noticed in grasping the type of the specific game state are clarified, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  Feature A6. Each of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is set to end without executing the new variable entry control after the low identification section is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, characterized by:

  According to the feature A6, when the low identification section ends normally, it is difficult to grasp which type the specific game state is after the end of the specific game state. Thereby, in such a situation, it is possible to cause the player to predict which type it was even after the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the importance of grasping the type of the specific game state is increased in accordance with the entering state of the game ball in the low identification section, and the degree of attention to the game of the grasp is increased.

  Feature A7. Ending when the first specific gaming state is ended and when the second specific gaming state is ended, and the state of the gaming state to be set after the end is different or difficult to identify in the appearance of the gaming machine The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, comprising a later transition means (function of executing a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71).

  According to the feature A7, the importance of grasping the type of the specific game state is increased according to the game ball entering state in the low identification section, and the attention to the game of the grasp is increased. .

In addition, a specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that does not enter the open state or the open state per unit time is relatively low In the configuration having the switching mode and the high-frequency switching mode in which the opportunity to be in the open state per unit time is relatively high,
The transition means after the end is configured so that the transition determination mode is different between the case where the first specific gaming state is ended and the case where the second specific gaming state is ended, while the switching mode is the same. Also good.

Feature A8. The notification means (symbol display device) is configured so that the predetermined notification is performed when the section performed in the predetermined mode ends when the specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitching means. 41) is provided with notification control means (a function for executing the processing of step S721 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, a function for executing the processing of steps S1017 to S1019 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
The notification control means is configured such that the number of game balls entering the opening of the variable pitching means is the specific reference number in the opening of the variable pitching means related to the variable pitch control for the specific reference number of times. In any one of the features A1 to A7, a limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S720 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) is provided to limit the execution of the predetermined notification when it has been reached. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A8, when the predetermined notification is performed by the notification means, when the specific reference number of game balls end by entering the variable entry means, the player can clearly grasp it. Is possible. On the other hand, since the predetermined notification is not executed even if the number of game balls entered reaches the specific reference number in the opening of the variable ball entry means of the specific reference number of times, the game ball is entered into the variable ball entry means. It is easy for the player to pay attention to the number of times the variable pitching means is opened.

Feature A9. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the entry position to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the big prize opening / closing process). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
The specific gaming state (open / close) in which the variable entry control is performed based on the transition determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state Transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the execution mode);
In gaming machines equipped with
As the specific gaming state,
The game is configured to have a round game that is controlled so as to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number when the variable ball entry control is performed. A first specific game state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by an implicit high-accuracy large hit result A in the first embodiment) that is terminated when the game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times;
When the variable pitch control is executed for a predetermined specific number of times, the process ends and when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitch means. The second specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special outage result in the first embodiment),
Is set,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect (long-term aspect) and the low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set to be high and low,
The first specific game state and the second specific game state are advanced by the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the operation of the variable entry means indicates which specific game state is in progress. The low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify is set in the appearance of
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number.

  According to the feature A9, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which the identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In this case, in the low identification section in the second specific gaming state, it is possible to shorten the section by continuing to fire the game ball and generating a specific reference number of game balls. In particular, since the specific reference number of the second specific game state is set to be smaller than the upper limit number of round games, the above situation can occur. Thereby, the player can grasp which side of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is not executed according to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section. It becomes. In other words, a game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and the game in which the specific game state on the side that is not being executed can be grasped according to the entry mode of the game ball are provided to the player in a balanced manner. be able to.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

  Note that a configuration newly limited in any one of the features A3 to A8 may be applied to the configuration of the feature A9. In this case, there is a synergistic effect by applying each configuration.

Feature A10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the entry position to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the big prize opening / closing process). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
The specific gaming state (open / close) in which the variable entry control is performed based on the transition determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state Transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the execution mode);
In gaming machines equipped with
As the execution mode of at least a part of the specific gaming state, the variable pitch control is performed and the variable pitch control is executed for a reference number of times determined corresponding to the zone. Or a reference number of game balls determined to correspond to the section enters the opening of the variable entry means when the reference period determined corresponding to the section has elapsed. The unit interval that ends when the
As the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (in the first embodiment) in which a low identification section in which the specific gaming state is indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means is set. For example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by the non-explicit high probability winning result A) and a second specific gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special loss result in the first embodiment) are set,
The number of the unit sections included in the low identification section in the first specific gaming state is different from the number of the unit sections included in the low identification section in the second specific gaming state. To play.

  According to the feature A10, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In this case, since the number of unit sections included in the low identification section of the first specific gaming state is different from the number of unit sections included in the low identification section of the second specific gaming state, the low identification section When a large number of game balls are entered into the variable entry means, the number of variable entry controls to be executed at the minimum in the low discrimination section is different. Thereby, a player grasps the side which is not executed among the 1st specific game state and the 2nd specific game state by the relation between the entrance mode to the variable entrance means and the number of times of opening of the variable entrance means. It becomes possible. In other words, a game with a good balance between a game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and a game in which the specific game state on the side that is not likely to be executed can be grasped according to the entry mode of the game ball. Can be provided.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

  It should be noted that the reference number or reference period may be the same in each unit section, may be different from each other in a predetermined combination, or may be the same in each unit section, and may be the same in a predetermined combination or individual. May be different.

Feature A11. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
An opening provided in the gaming area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter (a first prize opening 32a in the first embodiment, a first big prize opening 236a in the second embodiment, and a second big prize) And a variable pitching means configured to be able to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state (variable winning device 32 in the first embodiment, first variable winning device in the second embodiment). 236, a second variable winning device 237),
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determining means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71, in the second embodiment, the main controller 71, a function of executing the processing of step S1901 to step S1915 in the MPU 92 of 71),
Based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to the transition of the gaming state, a transition means (first for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state in which the variable entry control is performed) In the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71, and in the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2004 to S2010 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71),
In gaming machines equipped with
As the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (in the first embodiment) in which a low identification section in which the specific gaming state is indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means is set. For example, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the non-explicit highly probable outcome result A, and in the second embodiment, for example, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the explicit branch-corresponding highly accurate result) and the second specific gaming state (in the first embodiment) For example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special loss result, and an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special loss result in the second embodiment are set,
In the low identification section of one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball control and is in the open state. Special control execution means for executing special control corresponding to making it easier for the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is not in the other specific gaming state based on the occurrence (in the first embodiment, the main control device 71, a function of executing the processing of step S505 and step S506 in the MPU 92 and a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S712, and a function of executing the processing of step S2008, step S2122 and step S2123 in the second embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature A11, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  By continuously launching the game ball in the low identification section and generating the game ball entering the variable ball entry means, the first specific game state and the second specific game state can be determined through the execution of special control. The player can grasp the side that is not executed. In other words, a game with a good balance between a game in which the type of the specific game state is predicted and a game in which the specific game state on the side that is not likely to be executed can be grasped according to the entry mode of the game ball. Can be provided.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the specific game state.

Feature A12. As the transition determination result, a first transition determination result in which the state of the gaming state set after the specific gaming state may be different (in the first embodiment, for example, the non-explicit high probability winning result, in the second embodiment, For example, a high-accuracy result corresponding to an explicit branch) and a second transition determination result (for example, a special failure result in the first embodiment, for example, a special failure result in the second embodiment) are set.
The transition means includes
Based on the first transition determination result, the transition means corresponding to the first transition determination for shifting the gaming state to the first specific gaming state (step S507 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 in the first embodiment). , Step S609, step S613, step S614, and step S802, in the second embodiment, a negative determination is made in step S2201, step S2206, and step S2207 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71, and subsequent processing. Function to execute)
Based on the determination result of the second transition, the transition means corresponding to the second transition determination that shifts the gaming state to the second specific gaming state (step S505 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 in the first embodiment). , A function of executing the processing of step S506 and step S802, a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S901 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 and executing the subsequent processing in the second embodiment),
The gaming machine according to Feature A11, comprising:

  According to the feature A12, it is possible to increase the importance of grasping the type of the specific game state in accordance with the entering state of the game ball in the low identification section, and the attention to the grasping game is increased.

  Feature A13. The special control execution means is directed to the variable pitching means that is the target of the variable pitching control and is in the open state in the low identification section of one of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. Based on the fact that the game ball has entered, the variable control means has a special action that is not executed or is relatively unlikely to be executed in the other specific game state as the special control. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature A11 or A12, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be executed by a different gaming machine component.

  According to the feature A13, when the type of the specific game state currently being executed is determined according to the game ball entering mode, the player only has to confirm the presence / absence of the special action. Can be done.

  Feature A14. The special control execution means is configured such that a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section in the first specific game state. The gaming machine according to Feature A13, wherein, based on the occurrence, new variable entry control is performed thereafter.

  According to the feature A14, even if the first specific game state is executed, if no game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low identification section, a new variable ball entry control is performed thereafter. Is not done. And when it becomes the said condition, it will become difficult to distinguish from the case of a 2nd specific game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means that is open in the low identification section.

  Further, in this configuration, depending on whether or not a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low identification section of the first specific game state, there is a difference in the benefits obtained by the player during the first specific game state. Will occur. That is, not only is the player given the benefit of being able to grasp the type of a specific gaming state according to the manner of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the low identification section, but thereafter The player is given the benefit that variable entry control is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the variable entrance means that is open in the low identification section.

Feature A15. As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect are set to be high and low,
The low identification section is set so that the unit aspect of the variable entry control executed during the section is the low expectation aspect,
In addition, the special control execution means may enter a game ball into the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state in the low identification section in the first specific game state. The gaming machine according to Feature A13 or A14, wherein the variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is performed as the special action based on the occurrence of a ball. .

  According to the feature A15, it is possible to give the low identification section while suppressing the number of entering the variable entering means during the specific gaming state from being extremely increased. Furthermore, in contrast to the configuration in which a special operation is performed based on the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the low identification section in the first specific gaming state, the low identification section has a low expectation mode. By executing the variable entry control, the player's attention to the entry of the game ball into the variable entry means that is open in the low identification section is increased accordingly.

  In addition, even if the first specific gaming state is executed, if the game ball does not enter the variable ball entry means in the low discrimination section, the variable ball entry control according to the high expectation mode is subsequently performed. Not done. And when it becomes the said condition, it will become difficult to distinguish from the case of a 2nd specific game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game ball entering the variable ball entry means that is open in the low identification section.

  Further, in this configuration, depending on whether or not a game ball enters the variable ball entry means in the low identification section of the first specific game state, there is a difference in the benefits obtained by the player during the first specific game state. Will occur. That is, not only is the player given the benefit of being able to grasp the type of a specific gaming state according to the manner of entering the game ball into the variable ball entry means in the low identification section, but thereafter The player is given the benefit that variable entry control according to the high expectation mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's degree of attention with respect to the entrance of the game ball to the variable entrance means that is open in the low identification section.

  Feature A16. Regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball entry control and is in the open state during the zone, the low identification zone is the variable ball entry. The gaming machine according to Feature A14 or A15, wherein the control is set to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature A16, when entering the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, a plurality of variable pitching controls are always executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the disappearance of the player's satisfaction with the transition to the specific gaming state.

Feature A17. The game area is provided with a plurality of the variable entry means,
The variable entrance control is executed a plurality of times in the low discrimination section, and a predetermined variable of the plurality of variable entrance means is executed in a part of the execution times of the variable entrance control in the low discrimination section. Control object setting means for setting the ball entry means to be the control object and the variable entry means different from the predetermined variable entry means to be the control object in the other execution times of the variable entry control (second implementation) In the form, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 has a function of executing the processing of step S2213 and step S2214.
The control target setting means has a mode in which each of the plurality of variable pitching means is selected as a control target in the low identification section in the first specific gaming state and the low identification section in the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A16, characterized in that they are the same.

  According to the feature A17, it is possible to change the type of the variable entry means that the player aims at entering the game ball in the low identification section, and the game in the low identification section is suppressed from becoming monotonous. Further, even in such a configuration that suppresses monotonization, each of the plurality of variable pitching means is controlled in the low identification section in the first specific gaming state and the low identification section in the second specific gaming state. The mode selected as is the same. Therefore, the function of making it impossible to identify in the low identification section whether the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state is present.

Feature A18. As the plurality of variable pitching means,
The variable entry corresponding to the branch, which is subject to the variable entry control, and the occurrence of the entry of the game ball in the open state is at least one condition for the subsequent execution of the variable entry control. Ball means (second variable winning device 237);
Non-branch compatible variable entry that is subject to the variable entry control and the occurrence of a game entry in the open state is not included in the conditions for the subsequent execution of the variable entry control. Ball means (first variable winning device 236);
With
The control object setting means sets the variable entry means corresponding to the non-branch to be a control object in the execution time of the variable entry control other than the final round in the low discrimination section, and sets the control object setting means in the low discrimination section. In the final variable entry control, the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is set to be controlled.
The special control execution means is configured such that a game ball enters the branch-corresponding variable ball entry means that is in the open state in a state in which the final variable ball entry control is performed in the low discrimination section. The gaming machine according to Feature A17, wherein, based on the occurrence, the new variable entry control is performed as the special operation after the low discrimination section.

  According to the feature A18, when the variable entry means corresponding to the branch is subjected to the variable entry control, it is noted that the game ball enters the variable entry means. When a non-branch-compatible variable ball entry means is subject to variable ball entry control, the player's attention to the occurrence of a game ball is slightly reduced, but the player can digest the specific game state with peace of mind. Will be. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game in the low identification section while maintaining the satisfaction of having shifted to the specific game state.

  Also, instead of switching the role of one variable pitching means between a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching, a role corresponding to branching and a role corresponding to non-branching for each hardware configuration of variable pitching means And are distinguished. This makes it possible for the player to clearly grasp whether it is time to pay attention to the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable ball entry means or the time to digest a specific game state with peace of mind. Can do.

Feature A19. The game turn operation of each game time is performed with the game turn operation being started as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means and the game turn operation being ended as one game time. Game control means for controlling predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) (functions for executing the processing of steps S1001 to S1011 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 in the first embodiment) and the display control device 111, in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2401 to S2408 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
Effect control means for a specific game state that performs an effect for the specific game state in the situation where the specific game state is being executed (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1012 to S1019 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) And the display control device 111 in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing in steps S2409 to S2415 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
With
The game times control means uses the game result as the notification result in which the specific game state of the transfer destination cannot be identified regardless of whether the game state shifts to the first specific game state or the second specific game state. Ending means for ending the reusing operation (in the first embodiment, the function of executing step S1008 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, in the second embodiment, in step S2405 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) Process execution function)
The production control means for the specific game state cannot identify the specific game state to be executed at least until the low identification section is ended in any of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Or a means for providing an effect that is difficult to identify (in the first embodiment, a function of executing an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72, in the second embodiment, the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) The game machine according to any one of features A12 to A18, which includes a function of executing the process of step S2411 in FIG.

  According to the feature A19, either the first specific game state or the second specific game state is executed at the timing before the low identification section elapses from the notification result of the game turning action or the effect state for the specific game state. The player cannot grasp what is being done. This increases the possibility of playing a game in the low identification section while expecting that it will be desirable for the player among the first specific game state and the second specific game state, and the degree of attention to the specific game state Is improved.

Feature A20. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the entry position to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the big prize opening / closing process). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
The specific gaming state (open / close) in which the variable entry control is performed based on the transition determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state Transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the execution mode);
In gaming machines equipped with
The specific gaming state is configured to have a round game that continues until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and is terminated when the round game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times. A specific game state for round games is set,
As the specific game state corresponding to the round game, the aspect of the variable pitch control in the specific game state is similar in appearance, but in the specific round game corresponding to a predetermined execution order, the variable pitch control A plurality of types of execution modes (for example, an opening / closing execution mode triggered by the non-explicit high probability hit result B, and an explicit high A game machine characterized by including an opening / closing execution mode triggered by a probable hit result B).

  According to the feature A20, it is possible to change the duration of a specific round game corresponding to a predetermined execution order while maintaining the same execution pattern of the variable entry control. Thereby, for example, by performing the production and notification according to the result of entering the variable entry means in a specific round game, for the player, through the confirmation of the production and notification, the currently set control It is possible to predict the mode.

Feature A21. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching the entry position to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (in the first embodiment, the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 performs the big prize opening / closing process). Function to execute)
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
The specific gaming state (open / close) in which the variable entry control is performed based on the transition determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state Transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the execution mode);
In gaming machines equipped with
The specific gaming state is configured to have a round game that continues until a predetermined termination condition is satisfied, and is terminated when the round game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times. A specific game state for round games is set,
As the specific game state corresponding to the round game, the aspect of the variable pitch control that is executed in a plurality of round games consecutive from a predetermined execution order is similar in appearance, but a specific one of the plurality of round games is specified. In the round game, a plurality of types of execution modes (for example, an unspecified high-accuracy big hit result B is triggered) in which at least one of the total period in which the variable pitching means is in the open state and the number of times of the variable pitching control are different. And an opening / closing execution mode triggered by an explicit high-accuracy big hit result B).

  According to the feature A21, it is possible to make the duration of the specific round game included in the predetermined section different, while the execution pattern of the variable pitch control at least in the predetermined section is the same. Thereby, for example, by performing the production and notification according to the result of entering the variable entry means in a specific round game, for the player, through the confirmation of the production and notification, the currently set control It is possible to predict the mode.

  Feature A22. A special notification that causes the notification means (symbol display device 41) to perform a special notification in advance based on the fact that the entry to the variable entry means has occurred while the specific round game is being executed. The gaming machine according to feature A20 or A21, comprising control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1014 to S1016 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 in the first embodiment).

  By applying the configuration of the feature A22 to the configuration of the feature A20 or A21, the player can predict the currently set control mode through confirmation of the special notification.

  The invention of the above-described feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine is known that includes a picture display device that displays a plurality of pictures on a display screen. In such a gaming machine, for example, when a game ball passes through an operating port provided in a gaming area, a big hit lottery is performed as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player such as a big hit state is generated. The variation display of the pattern is started. When the big hit lottery is won, a combination of specific pictures and the like are finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state. With the transition to the specific gaming state, for example, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in the gaming area is started, and a large amount of gaming balls are paid out.

  For example, in more detail about the variable pitching device of the pachinko machine shown in Patent Document 1, in a situation that is not in the specific gaming state, the gaming ball cannot enter or is in a closed state that is difficult to enter, and the specific gaming When the state is changed, the state is switched to the open state for a specific number of times.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine described above, when the game state is the specific game state, the player's interest tends to concentrate on how much game balls can be acquired. However, in the case of the conventional pachinko machine, since the player can predict to some extent the number of game balls that can be acquired under the specific game state, there is a concern that the game in the specific game state may become monotonous.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state First transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state (opening / closing execution mode);
When the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state is ended, second transition means for shifting to a game state different from the game state before the specific game state (when the open / close execution mode ends in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) To execute the migration process)
Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the gaming state has been transferred;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the means for recognition to a recognizable state where the management device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode when a transition determination result in which transition by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit is performed, a mode during the specific gaming state and a mode of transition after the specific gaming state Multiple types of transition modes are set so that at least one of them is different,
The recognizing control means may be a first transition mode (e.g., a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability winning result B among the plurality of types of transition modes, or a high frequency support mode). In the case of a transition mode when the result is an unspecified high probability winning result A), the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while the game mode transition mode is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of low probable hit result A or a transition mode in the case of an unspecified high probable hit result A in the situation of the low frequency support mode) at the specific timing Setting means for maintaining the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 is performed). Game machine characterized by comprising a function) of.

  In the gaming machine of feature B1, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible.

  In this case, in the case of the first transition mode, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, while in the case of the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained at a specific timing. As a result, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  Further, for example, if the management device recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game well.

  It should be noted that the “specific timing” includes the start timing of the specific gaming state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific gaming state becomes the specific time, and the specific gaming device operates in the specific gaming state. The configuration includes a case where the predetermined number of operations of the gaming device is started or ended. In addition, in a configuration in which an opening period and an ending period are set in the specific gaming state, the timing during any one of these periods is included.

Feature B2. The first transition mode is a mode in which a specific advantage is advantageous in the specific game state or in the game state thereafter.
The second transition aspect is an aspect in which the specific advantage is disadvantageous,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the situation where the specific advantage level is advantageous is started. On the other hand, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the game state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state at the specific timing. Game machines.

  According to the feature B2, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed uniformly, but is performed flexibly according to the content of the specific advantage degree of the transfer destination. As a result, while the management of a situation where a specific advantage level is advantageous in a game hall or the like can be performed satisfactorily, for example, the execution of the management is caused by the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

Feature B3. The first transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, a transition is made to the first gaming state in which a specific element (support mode) that changes the degree of advantage is relatively advantageous,
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state in which the specific element is relatively disadvantageous,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition aspect, the setting means sets the recognizable state at the specific timing before the transition to the first gaming state is performed, When the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the game state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being in the recognizable state at the specific timing. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B3, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed uniformly, but is performed flexibly according to the gaming state after the specific gaming state. As a result, the management of the gaming state after the specific gaming state can be performed satisfactorily in a gaming hall or the like, but the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes, for example, is lost due to the execution of the management. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  Note that the specific element may be configured to recognize from the gaming machine operation that the factor is advantageous.

Feature B4. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode as the specific element, while the second gaming state is the switching mode in which the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode as the specific element. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the gaming machine is in a gaming state.

  According to the feature B4, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, management of the frequency of entering the specific pitching portion in the game hall or illegally opening the specific pitching portion. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act to be performed. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is made different, the player can easily recognize which is the switching mode. Accordingly, in the first transition mode in which the high-frequency switching mode is set after the specific gaming state, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, and in the second transition mode in which the low-frequency switching mode is set after the specific gaming state is recognized at the specific timing. Even if it is discriminated that the setting to the possible state is not performed, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature B5. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively high (a long time mode or a medium time mode) and a mode in which a relatively low mode (a short time mode) is set,
The specific gaming state in the first transition mode and the specific gaming state in the second transition mode proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is the first transition mode and the second mode. It is configured so that a low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify which of the transition modes is involved occurs,
In the case where the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting unit is configured to perform the specific state after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the timing state is set to the recognizable state, when the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained without the recognizable state even when the specific timing is reached. The gaming machine according to Feature B3 or B4, wherein

  According to the feature B5, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after a specific gaming state in a low identification section that is made indistinguishable. The game is played while expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the setting of the recognizable state is not performed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, for example, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to gaming machine management by the management device. There is no. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine Difficult to create administrative problems. Furthermore, if the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first gaming state, so whether the specific element is advantageous. Such management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B6. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
In the specific game state in the first transition mode and the specific game state in the second transition mode, the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed as a section from a start timing to at least an intermediate timing. And a low discrimination section in which it is difficult to identify or difficult to discriminate between the first transition mode and the second transition mode in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means. Has been
In the case where the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting unit is configured to perform the specific state after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While the timing state is set to the recognizable state, when the game state transition mode is the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained without the recognizable state even when the specific timing is reached. The gaming machine according to Feature B3 or B4, wherein

  According to the feature B6, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after a specific gaming state in a low identification section that cannot be identified. The game is played while expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the setting of the recognizable state is not performed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to gaming machine management by the management device. Absent. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, if the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the first gaming state, so whether the specific element is advantageous. Such management can be performed satisfactorily.

The specific game state includes a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number, and further, the round game In a configuration in which a specific game state corresponding to a round game that is terminated based on execution of a predetermined upper limit number of times is set,
In the high expectation mode, the upper limit number of game balls are likely to enter the variable pitching means to be controlled during the variable pitch control according to the mode. Whereas it is an aspect
In the low expectation mode, during the period when the variable pitch control according to the mode is being performed, the upper limit number of game balls have not entered into the variable pitch means that is the control target, or It is good also as a structure which is an aspect which is hard to generate | occur | produce.

  In order to clearly distinguish the ease of entering the game ball from the low expectation mode and the high expectation mode, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target of variable entry control is in the open state May be set to a period shorter than the launch period of the game balls. Also, in the low expectation mode, the period during which the target for variable entry control is in the open state is a period that is equal to or greater than the launch period of the game balls, and the launch period of the game balls × n (n is greater than the upper limit number) It is good also as a structure set to the following period. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit number is 4 or more, the n may be any number of “1”, “2”, or “3”.

Feature B7. Producing in the low identification section a low identification effect of an aspect in which it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the specific gaming state according to the first transition aspect or the specific gaming state according to the second transition aspect Production control means (a function for executing an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) to be performed by the execution means (the symbol display device 41);
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the setting means is at the specific timing after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. While setting to the recognizable state, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, even if the specific timing is reached, the recognizable state is not maintained and the recognizable state is maintained. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein

  According to feature B7, it is difficult to recognize whether a specific element is advantageous or unfavorable after a specific gaming state in a situation where a low discrimination effect is being performed. A game is played while expecting an advantageous state after the specific game state by visually recognizing the mode and the low identification effect. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, in the situation where the low identification effect is being performed, the recognizable state is not set, so that the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. Absent. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine. Furthermore, when the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set after the end of the low identification effect and before the transition to the first gaming state is performed. The management of whether or not a particular element is advantageous can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature B8. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means to a first recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which the recognition is impossible. First setting means for
Further, the recognition control means changes the state to the second recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the first gaming state has been performed or the second unrecognizable state in which the recognition is impossible. Any one of features B3 to B7, comprising second setting means for setting the state of the means (function for executing the processing of step S516, step S905 and step S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B8, the management device can distinguish and recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state and the transition to the first gaming state have been performed. It is possible to manage whether or not it is in a state, and it is possible to manage whether or not the transition to the first gaming state has been performed without triggering the end of the specific gaming state Become.

  In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, the first recognizable state is not set in any transition mode. 2 When it is set to a recognizable state, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature B3 is provided, and when the transition to the first gaming state after the specific gaming state is made, the first recognizable state is set in advance so that the management can be performed satisfactorily. Can be.

Feature B9. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The first transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from a mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is set. And
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the low-frequency switching mode is set. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein:

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature B9, the setting to the recognizable state is not performed in relation to the transition determination mode, and the setting to the recognizable state is performed in relation to the switching mode. This allows the player to predict which transition determination mode is after the specific gaming state, so as not to lose the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game, while entering the specific pitching part in the gaming hall. It is possible to satisfactorily perform the management of the ball frequency and the monitoring of the act of illegally opening the specific entrance part.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

  Feature B10. The first transition mode and the second transition mode are both transition modes that are performed with the same transition determination result (for example, the non-explicit high probability winning result A) as a trigger, while the first transition mode is a predetermined one. The transition mode is based on the same transition determination result in the gaming state, and the second transition mode is based on the same transition determination result in a gaming state different from the predetermined gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9, which is a transition mode performed.

  According to the feature B10, even if it is the same transition determination result, the transition mode of the subsequent game state is different, and it is possible to diversify the game without increasing the type of transition determination result. Even in this case, the recognizable state is set in a flexible manner according to the transition mode, instead of setting the recognizable state in a uniform manner according to the transition determination result. Thereby, the gaming machine management through the setting of the recognizable state can be performed without losing the above effect.

Feature B11. As the mode of the specific gaming state, a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively high (a long time mode or a medium time mode) and a mode in which a relatively low mode (a short time mode) is set,
As a determination result of the transition determination means, the transition to the specific gaming state in the relatively low mode occurs, but when the specific gaming state ends, the same game state as the gaming state before the specific gaming state The partial transition result (special outage result) that returns to the state is set,
The recognizing control means maintains the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state when the game state transition occurs based on the partial transition result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the mode in the specific gaming state based on the fact that the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation from the start timing of the specific gaming state to at least halfway timing is the partial transition result. Or it is configured to produce a low discrimination section that is difficult to identify,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

  According to the feature B11, by setting the partial transition result, the specific gaming state is suppressed while suppressing the influence on the granting rate of the privilege for the player and suppressing the influence on the transition rate of the gaming state excluding the specific gaming state. It becomes possible to use the transition to as an effect. Also, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured to generate a low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify, so the specific gaming state is sandwiched in the low identification section. A game is played while predicting whether a game state transition will occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section by the management of the gaming machine by the management device is not lost. In addition, since the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is relatively low, even if the recognizable state is not set, the gaming machine Difficult to create administrative problems.

Feature B12. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
Furthermore, as a determination result of the transition determination means, a transition to the specific gaming state that ends after the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed a specific number of times occurs, but the specific gaming state has ended. In this case, a partial transition result (special outage result) for returning to the same gaming state as the gaming state before the specific gaming state is set,
The recognizing control means maintains the unrecognizable state without making the recognizable state when the game state transition occurs based on the partial transition result.
The second transition mode is indistinguishable from the specific gaming state mode based on the fact that the operation mode of the variable pitching means from the start timing of the specific gaming state to at least halfway timing is the partial transition result or It is configured to produce a low discrimination section that is difficult to identify,
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until a predetermined timing after the low identification section is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

  According to the feature B12, the partial game result is set, so that the influence on the grant rate for the player is suppressed and the influence on the game state transfer rate excluding the specific game state is suppressed, while the specific game state It becomes possible to use the transition to as an effect. Also, in the specific gaming state in the second transition mode, the specific gaming state based on the partial transition result is configured to generate a low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify, so the specific gaming state is sandwiched in the low identification section. A game is played while predicting whether a game state transition will occur. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the setting of the recognizable state is not performed until at least halfway timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is lost due to gaming machine management by the management device. Absent. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur.

Feature B13. Performing a low-identification effect in the low-identification section in a state where it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the specific game state according to the partial transition result or the specific game state according to the second transition mode Means control means (design display device 41) to be performed by the means (design display device 41) (display control device 111 and function for executing the effect determination processing for the opening and closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72),
The setting means is characterized in that, when the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the low identification effect ends. Game machines.

  According to the feature B13, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. There is no end to it. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine.

Feature B14. A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
The second transition mode is a mode in which, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from the mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the low-frequency switching mode is set. And
The setting means does not perform the setting to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the gaming state when the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode. Or the gaming machine according to B13.

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature B14, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific gaming state, but in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the low-frequency switching mode, the recognizable state is triggered by that. Setting is not performed. Thereby, when a specific gaming state having a low identification section occurs, it is possible to continue the player's sense of expectation not only in the low identification section but also after the specific gaming state.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature B15. A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means for controlling the state of the specific entrance portion (function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71);
With
The transition determination means determines that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific pitching portion, and performs the determination based on the condition. The determination mode has a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the transition determination result is relatively high and low,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
In the second transition mode, after the specific gaming state, the transition determination mode is changed from a mode before the specific gaming state, and the switching mode is shifted to a gaming state in which the high-frequency switching mode is set. And
When the transition state of the gaming state is the second transition mode, the setting means is a timing after the low identification section is started and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The game machine according to Feature B12 or B13, wherein the game machine is set to the recognizable state.

  While the type of transition judgment mode can be made indistinguishable or difficult to discriminate in the appearance of the gaming machine, the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is changed. It is difficult to recognize which mode it is. Under such circumstances, in the feature B15, the transition determination mode is changed across the specific gaming state, and in the second transition mode in which the switching mode is the high-frequency switching mode, the game state after the specific gaming state is changed to the gaming state. It is set to a recognizable state at the timing before the transition is performed. This makes it possible to play a game while expecting an advantageous state after a specific game state in a low identification section, and also manages the frequency of entering a specific ball in the game hall and specifies it illegally. It is possible to satisfactorily monitor the act of trying to open the ball-entry unit.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature B16. The first transition mode is a mode in which a degree of expectation that a predetermined privilege is granted during the specific gaming state is relatively high,
The second transition mode is a mode in which the degree of expectation that the predetermined privilege is granted during the specific gaming state is relatively low,
When the game mode transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting means sets the recognition state to the recognizable state at the specific timing before the start of the situation allowing the predetermined privilege to be granted. On the other hand, when the game mode transition mode is the second transition mode, the game state is maintained in the unrecognizable state without being in the recognizable state at the specific timing. The gaming machine according to any one of B15.

  According to the feature B16, the setting of the recognizable state is not performed uniformly, but is flexibly performed in relation to a situation in which a predetermined privilege can be given in the specific gaming state. As a result, benefits can be managed well in game halls, etc., but the effects of setting multiple types of transition modes will not be lost due to the execution of such management. It becomes possible to do.

  Feature B17. Based on the fact that the recognition means is in the recognizable state, the management device performs a predetermined notification on a display device (data counter DC) provided corresponding to the gaming machine in the gaming hall. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B16, wherein:

  According to the feature B17, when the predetermined notification is performed in the game hall, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above.

Feature B18. A game turning operation is started based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the game turning operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the determination result of the transition determining means based on the establishment of the condition. Game time control for controlling predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41) so that the game time operation of each game time is performed in response to the establishment of the predetermined condition as one game time. Means (function for executing the processing of steps S1001 to S1011 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111);
Effect control means for specific game state that performs an effect for the specific game state in the situation where the specific game state is being executed (function and display for executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1013 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) Control device 111);
With
The gaming time control means may be configured as the notification result in which the transition destination mode cannot be identified regardless of whether the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. An ending means (a function for executing the process of step S1008 in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72) for ending the game turning operation;
The effect control means for the specific gaming state is at least halfway from the start timing regardless of whether the gaming state transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode. It is provided with the means (function which performs the process of step S1101-step S1110 in MPU102 of the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 72) which performs the production which cannot distinguish the aspect of a transfer destination over the whole, and is characterized by the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B17.

  According to the feature B18, the player grasps whether the game state transition mode is the first transition mode or the second transition mode from the notification result of the game turning operation or the effect mode for the specific game state. difficult. This increases the possibility of playing a game in the specific game state while expecting that it will be desirable for the player in the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and improves the degree of attention to the specific game state Is planned.

Feature B19. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification that ends when a predetermined end condition is satisfied based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the gaming state First transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for shifting the gaming state to the gaming state (opening / closing execution mode);
When the end condition is satisfied and the specific game state is ended, second transition means for shifting to a game state different from the game state before the specific game state (when the open / close execution mode ends in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) To execute the migration process)
A recognition means (external terminal board 81) used to make the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the specific device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state in which recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode when a transition determination result in which transition by both the first transition unit and the second transition unit is performed, a mode during the specific gaming state and a mode of transition after the specific gaming state Multiple types of transition modes are set so that at least one of them is different,
The recognizing control means may be a first transition mode (e.g., a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability winning result B among the plurality of types of transition modes, or a high frequency support mode). In the case of a transition mode when the result is an unspecified high probability winning result A), the recognizable state is set at a specific timing, while the game mode transition mode is the second of the plurality of types of transition modes. In the case of a transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of low probable hit result A or a transition mode in the case of an unspecified high probable hit result A in the situation of the low frequency support mode) at the specific timing Setting means for maintaining the unrecognizable state without setting the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71 is performed). Game machine characterized by comprising a function) of.

  In the gaming machine of feature B19, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well.

  In this case, in the case of the first transition mode, the recognition state is set at a specific timing, while in the case of the second transition mode, the recognition state is maintained at a specific timing. As a result, it is possible to flexibly set the recognizable state between the first transition mode and the second transition mode, and the first transition mode and the second transition mode are set as described above. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the specific device recognizes that the game state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this.

  As described above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the game well.

  It should be noted that the “specific timing” includes the start timing of the specific gaming state and the timing when the elapsed time from the start timing of the specific gaming state becomes the specific time, and the specific gaming device operates in the specific gaming state. The configuration includes a case where the predetermined number of operations of the gaming device is started or ended. In addition, in a configuration in which an opening period and an ending period are set in the specific gaming state, the timing during any one of these periods is included.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the gaming state has been transferred;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the means for recognition to a recognizable state where the management device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode when the determination result is that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege proceeds in a relatively low mode and a relatively high mode A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability hit result B) having the second section to be advanced is set,
The recognizing control means is configured to change the game state transition state so that the recognition state is not allowed in at least part of the first section and the recognition state is in at least part of the second section. The game machine is characterized by comprising setting means for switching the setting of the means for recognition in the transition mode (function for executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71).

  In the gaming machine of feature C1, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible. In addition, by setting a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section are generated as the transition state of the gaming state, the execution of the specific gaming state is produced while suppressing the influence on the predetermined privilege grant rate. It can be used as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, the recognizable state is not set uniformly, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state are set according to the staying section. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. Thereby, when the transition state of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state is set flexibly, and the gaming machine management is performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature C2. The specific transition mode is a mode in which, as the specific gaming state, the transition to the switching-specific specific gaming state having the first section and the second section,
The setting means is in the specific game state corresponding to the switching so that the recognition state is not allowed in at least part of the first section and the recognition state is in at least part of the second section. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the setting of the means for recognition is switched.

  According to the feature C2, since the specific game state corresponding to switching is set as the specific game state, the degree of attention to the specific game state can be improved. In addition, in the specific game state corresponding to the switching, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C3. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
The first zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed. A gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2.

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable pitching means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable pitching means in the second section. Thereby, diversification of the game in a specific game state is achieved using the variable pitching means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature C2, the recognizable state can be flexibly set depending on whether the operation of the variable pitching means is used as an effect or is used for the purpose of giving a privilege. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state, it becomes possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily. Further, for example, in the first section where the presentation is performed through the operation of the variable pitching means, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of giving a privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C4. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the gaming state has been transferred;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the means for recognition to a recognizable state where the management device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode in the case where the determination result of the transition to the specific game state is obtained, there are a plurality of types so that at least one of the mode in the specific game state and the mode of transition after the specific game state is different Transition mode is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the result is an explicit high probability winning result B), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Compared with the case where the result is an explicit high probability winning result (for example, the transition mode when the result is the recognizable state), setting means for delaying the timing for setting the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 A gaming machine characterized by having a function to be executed).

  In the gaming machine of feature C4, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible.

  In this case, when the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode, the timing for setting the recognizable state is delayed compared to the case where the game mode transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether it is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in a configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It will be possible to manage the gaming machine well.

  Further, for example, if the management device recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but delayed, it is still possible to manage gaming machines.

Feature C5. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the gaming state has been transferred;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the means for recognition to a recognizable state where the management device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As an aspect of the specific gaming state, an aspect with a relatively high expectation of granting a predetermined privilege (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively low aspect (short-time aspect) are set. ,
The state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high probability winning result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. A transition is made to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle of the timing,
When the control unit for recognition is shifted to the first specific gaming state, setting unit (steps S511 and S511 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) that delays the timing for setting the recognition state until after the intermediate timing of the section. A gaming machine having a function of executing the process of step S512.

  In the gaming machine of feature C5, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible. In addition, the provision of the predetermined privilege is provided by setting the first specific gaming state in which the section that progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the provision of the predetermined privilege is relatively low is generated at least halfway from the start timing. Execution of a specific gaming state can be used as an effect while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. Thereby, when it will transfer to the 1st specific game state, the setting of a recognizable state will be performed flexibly according to the progress situation, and the 1st specific game state was set as a specific game state Therefore, it is possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

  Also, for example, if the management device recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting multiple types of specific gaming state may be lost. Can be restricted.

Feature C6. As a transition mode of the gaming state triggered by the first determination result, after the first segment progressing in the relatively low mode, the second segment in which the game content related to the grant of privilege is changed is The specific aspect that occurs is set,
The setting means sets the recognizable state after timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section when the game state transition mode is the specific mode. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein:

  According to the feature C6, the recognizable state is flexibly set in accordance with the game content related to the provision of the privilege, and the first section is a transition state of the game state triggered by the first determination result. In the configuration in which the second section and the second section are set, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily. Further, for example, even if the recognizable state is not set, it is difficult to cause a problem in gaming machine management. In the first section, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game. Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C7. The first specific gaming state is configured such that a second section that proceeds in the relatively high mode is generated after the first section that continues in the relatively low mode.
When the setting means shifts to the first specific gaming state, the setting means sets the recognizable state after the timing in the middle of the first section and before the end of the second section. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or C6, characterized by

  According to the feature C7, the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state by flexibly setting the recognizable state depending on whether or not the expected degree of granting the predetermined privilege is high. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily. Further, for example, even if the recognizable state is not set, in the first section in which a problem in gaming machine management is not likely to occur, emphasis is placed on improving the attention level of the game, and the expected degree of granting a predetermined privilege is relative When a second section that is extremely high is generated, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C8. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. Based on the fact that (for example, the explicit high probability winning result A or the special outage result) is obtained, the second specific gaming state (for example, the pattern A of the pattern A) in which the relatively low aspect continues at least halfway from the start timing. Open / close execution mode)
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed in the relatively low mode, and the appearance mode of the gaming machine operation is any of the first specific game state and the second specific game state. It is configured so that a low identification section that cannot be identified or difficult to identify is generated.
When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until the specific timing after the low identification section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to C6 or C7, wherein the game machine is set to the recognizable state after the specific timing and before the end of the second section.

  According to the feature C8, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set at least until a specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the management of the gaming machine by the management device. . In addition, the low identification section is a section in which the specific gaming state progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of giving a predetermined privilege is low, so even if the recognizable state is not set, there is a problem in gaming machine management. Is difficult to occur. Furthermore, in the case of becoming the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to manage well whether or not the second section is reached. .

  Feature C9. When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until the low identification interval elapses, and when the setting means shifts to the first specific gaming state, the low identification interval The gaming machine according to C8, wherein the game machine is set to the recognizable state after and before the start timing of the second section.

  According to the feature C9, the effect of setting the low identification section over the entire low identification section can be prevented from being lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. At the timing when the section is started, this can be recognized by the management device.

Feature C10. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable pitch control by the variable pitch control means is performed,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively A high expectation aspect (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a low expectation aspect (short-time aspect) are set so as to be high and low,
The first zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode is performed, and the second zone is a zone where the variable pitch control according to the high expectation mode is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C9.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to perform an effect through the operation of the variable pitching means in the first section, and it is possible to give a privilege through the operation of the variable pitching means in the second section. Thereby, diversification of the game in a specific game state is achieved using the variable pitching means. In this case, since the features C3 and C4 are provided, the recognizable state can be set depending on whether the operation of the variable pitching means is used as an effect or for the purpose of giving a privilege. By being performed flexibly, gaming machine management can be performed satisfactorily in a configuration in which the first section and the second section are set in the first specific gaming state. Further, for example, in the first section where the presentation is performed through the operation of the variable pitching means, emphasis is placed on improving the degree of attention of the game, and in the second section where the frequency of giving a privilege to the player is improved, the gaming machine management Can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C11. The state transition means shifts to the first specific gaming state based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result, and the determination result of the transition determination means is the second determination result. The second specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern A) in which the relatively low mode continues for at least halfway from the start timing based on (for example, the explicit high probability winning result A). To be transferred to
The first specific game state and the second specific game state proceed by performing the variable pitch control according to the low expectation mode, and the first specific game state in terms of the operation of the variable pitch means. It is configured such that a low identification section is generated from a start timing when it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify which state is related to the state and the second specific gaming state,
When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the unrecognizable state at least until the specific timing after the low identification section is started, and shifts to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to C10, wherein the recognizable state is set after the specific timing and before the end of the second section.

  According to the feature C11, a game is played while predicting which of the first specific game state and the second specific game state is being executed in the low identification section in which identification is impossible. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, since the recognizable state is not set until the specific timing in the low identification section, the effect of setting the low identification section is not lost due to the gaming machine management by the management device. In addition, since the low-identification section is a section in which the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is relatively low, even if the recognizable state has not been set, The problem is hard to occur. Furthermore, in the case of becoming the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to manage well whether or not the second section is reached. .

  Feature C12. When the setting means shifts to the second specific gaming state, the setting means maintains the recognition disabled state at least until the low identification interval elapses, and when the setting means shifts to the first specific gaming state, the low identification interval The gaming machine according to C11, wherein the gaming machine is set to the recognizable state after and before the start timing of the second section.

  According to the feature C12, the effect of setting the low identification section over the entire low identification section can be prevented from being lost due to gaming machine management by the management device. At the timing when the section is started, this can be recognized by the management device.

Feature C13. In the low identification section, the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) performs a low identification effect in such a manner that it is impossible to identify or difficult to identify whether it is the first specific game state or the second specific game state. Effect control means (a function for executing the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 102 of the sound emission control device 72 and the display control device 111) to be performed;
The setting means maintains the non-recognizable state at least until the low identification effect ends when transitioning to the second specific gaming state, and the low identification effect when transitioning to the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to C11 or C12, wherein the game machine is set to the recognizable state after the end of and before the end of the second section.

  According to the feature C13, the effect of setting the low identification section can be further enhanced by performing the low identification effect in the low identification section. In this case, since the recognizable state is not set in the situation where the low identification effect is performed, the effect of setting the low identification effect is lost due to the management of the gaming machine by the management device. There is nothing. In addition, while the low identification effect is being performed, since the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means is a relatively low section, even if the recognizable state is not set, the game It is difficult for problems to occur in the ball management of the machine. Furthermore, in the case of becoming the second section, the recognizable state is set by the end of the second section, so that it is possible to manage well whether or not the second section is reached. .

Feature C14. As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing the advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous is set.
As a transition state of the game state including the transition to the second specific game state, a predetermined transition mode is set in which the specific element shifts to the advantageous game state after the second specific game state. ,
The setting means is configured to set the recognizable state before the start timing of the gaming state where the specific element is advantageous when the predetermined transition mode is achieved. C8, C9, The gaming machine according to any one of C11 to C13.

  According to the feature C14, in the low identification section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur thereafter or a gaming state in which a specific element is advantageous, and attention is paid to the game. It becomes possible to increase the degree. In addition, when a specific element is advantageous after the second specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the gaming state is performed, so whether or not the specific element is advantageous. Such management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C15. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 51) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A specific entry portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and configured to allow a game ball to enter and to be switched between an open state and a closed state;
An acceptance control means (a function for executing the process of step S205 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for controlling the state of the specific pitching portion;
With
The transition determination means is configured to perform the determination based on the assumption that at least a part of the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball enters the specific entrance portion,
The acceptance control means, as a switching mode for switching the specific ball portion between the open state and the closed state, a low frequency that the opportunity to enter the open state per unit time is not relatively low A switching mode and a high-frequency switching mode that has a relatively high chance of being in the open state per unit time,
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the second specific gaming state, a predetermined transition mode for transitioning to the gaming state that becomes the high-frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state is set,
The setting means sets the recognizable state before the start timing of the gaming state in the high-frequency switching mode when the predetermined transition mode is set. C8, C9, C11 to C13 The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C15, in the low identification section, the game is performed while predicting whether the second section will occur or the gaming state in the high-frequency switching mode will occur, and the degree of attention to the game is increased. It becomes possible. In addition, when the game state is changed to the high-frequency switching mode after the second specific gaming state, the recognizable state is set before the transition to the gaming state is performed. It becomes possible to manage well whether or not.

  In particular, by setting the recognizable state in relation to the switching mode, management of the frequency of entering the specific entrance part in the game hall and monitoring the act of attempting to open the specific entrance part illegally Etc. can be performed satisfactorily. In addition, since the switching mode is a mode in which the state relating to the movement of the specific entry portion is made different, it is easy for the player to recognize which is the switching mode. Therefore, when the game mode is changed to the high-frequency switching mode. Even if the recognizable state is set, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes is not lost.

  The “specific entry portion” is “a first state provided in the game area and having a size that allows a game ball to enter and in which the game ball can enter. And a second state in which entry is less likely to occur.

Feature C16. The setting means sets the state of the recognition means to a first recognizable state in which the management device can recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state has been performed or a first unrecognizable state in which the recognition is impossible. First setting means for
Furthermore, the control means for recognition is a second recognizable state that makes it possible to recognize in the management device that the transition to the gaming state that becomes the high-frequency switching mode has been performed, or a second non-recognizable state that makes it impossible to recognize. A feature C15 is characterized by further comprising second setting means for setting the state of the recognition means (a function for executing the processes of steps S516, S905, and S915 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71). Game machines.

  According to the feature C16, the management device can distinguish and recognize that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed and the transition to the gaming state that is the high-frequency switching mode. Therefore, it is possible to manage whether or not the specific gaming state is in progress, and manage whether or not the transition to the high-frequency switching mode is performed without triggering the end of the specific gaming state. It becomes possible.

  In the above configuration, in order to make it difficult to distinguish between the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the first recognizable state is not set in any specific gaming state. Then, when it is set to the second recognizable state, it becomes difficult to manage whether or not it is triggered by the end of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature C15 is provided, and after the second specific gaming state, when the game state is changed to the high-frequency switching mode, the first recognizable state is set in advance. Therefore, the above management can be performed satisfactorily.

Feature C17. The second specific game state is set so that the mode after the low identification section is different from the case of the first specific game state,
The setting means sets the recognizable state when the same delay period elapses in both the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. C8 , C9, C11 to C16 any one of the gaming machines.

  According to the feature C17, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing related to the setting of the delay period.

Feature C18. The second determination result is that the transition to the second specific gaming state according to the relatively low aspect occurs, but the gaming state before the second specific gaming state when the second specific gaming state ends. Is a determination result that will return to the same gaming state,
The recognizing control means does not perform the setting to the recognizable state triggered by the transition of the gaming state when the second determination result is obtained. C8, C9, C11 A gaming machine according to any one of C13 to C13.

  According to the feature C18, the recognizable state can be set flexibly in accordance with the game state transition mode.

Feature C19. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
A recognition means (external terminal board 81) used to make the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the specific device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state in which recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode when the determination result is that the transition to the specific gaming state is performed, in a mode in which the expectation of granting a predetermined privilege proceeds in a relatively low mode and a relatively high mode A specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode in the case of an explicit high probability hit result B) having the second section to be advanced is set,
The recognizing control means is configured to change the game state transition state so that the recognition state is not allowed in at least part of the first section and the recognition state is in at least part of the second section. The game machine is characterized by comprising setting means for switching the setting of the means for recognition in the transition mode (function for executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71).

  In the gaming machine of feature C19, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed satisfactorily. In addition, by setting a specific transition mode in which the first section and the second section are generated as the transition state of the gaming state, the execution of the specific gaming state is produced while suppressing the influence on the predetermined privilege grant rate. It can be used as a game, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, regardless of whether it is the first section or the second section, the recognizable state is not set uniformly, but the recognizable state and the unrecognizable state are set according to the staying section. The setting of the recognition means is switched between. Thereby, when the transition state of the gaming state becomes a specific transition mode, the recognizable state is set flexibly, and the gaming machine management is performed well in the configuration in which the specific transition mode is set. Is possible.

Feature C20. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
A recognition means (external terminal board 81) used to make the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the specific device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state in which recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a transition mode in the case where the determination result of the transition to the specific game state is obtained, there are a plurality of types so that at least one of the mode in the specific game state and the mode of transition after the specific game state is different Transition mode is set,
When the transition mode of the gaming state is a specific transition mode (for example, a transition mode when the result is an explicit high probability winning result B), the recognition control means is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Compared with the case where the result is an explicit high probability winning result (for example, the transition mode when the result is the recognizable state), setting means for delaying the timing for setting the recognizable state (the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71 A gaming machine characterized by having a function to be executed).

  In the gaming machine of feature C20, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well.

  In this case, when the game mode transition mode is a specific transition mode, the timing for setting the recognizable state is delayed compared to the case where the game mode transition mode is a predetermined transition mode different from the specific transition mode. Thereby, it becomes possible to flexibly set the recognizable state depending on whether it is a specific transition mode or a predetermined transition mode, and in a configuration in which a plurality of types of transition modes are set as described above, It will be possible to manage the gaming machine well.

  In addition, for example, if the specific device recognizes that the game state has shifted, the effect of setting a plurality of types of transition modes may be lost. It becomes possible to restrict this. Furthermore, since the recognizable state is not set at all but delayed, it is still possible to manage gaming machines.

Feature C21. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
A recognition means (external terminal board 81) used to make the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the specific device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state in which recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As an aspect of the specific gaming state, an aspect with a relatively high expectation of granting a predetermined privilege (long-term aspect or medium-time aspect) and a relatively low aspect (short-time aspect) are set. ,
The state transition means, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being the first determination result (for example, the explicit high probability winning result B), the section that proceeds in the relatively low mode is at least from the start timing. A transition is made to the first specific gaming state (for example, the opening / closing execution mode of pattern B) that occurs over the middle of the timing,
When the control unit for recognition is shifted to the first specific gaming state, setting unit (steps S511 and S511 in the MPU 92 of the main controller 71) that delays the timing for setting the recognition state until after the intermediate timing of the section. A gaming machine having a function of executing the process of step S512.

  In the gaming machine having the feature C21, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed satisfactorily. In addition, the provision of the predetermined privilege is provided by setting the first specific gaming state in which the section that progresses in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the provision of the predetermined privilege is relatively low is generated at least halfway from the start timing. Execution of a specific gaming state can be used as an effect while suppressing the influence on the rate, and the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing. Thereby, when it will transfer to the 1st specific game state, the setting of a recognizable state will be performed flexibly according to the progress situation, and the 1st specific game state was set as a specific game state Therefore, it is possible to manage the gaming machine satisfactorily.

  Also, for example, if the specific device recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, the effect of setting multiple types of specific gaming state may be lost. Can be restricted.

Feature C22. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
Recognizing means (external terminal board 81) used for recognizing the management device (hall computer HC) outside the gaming machine that the gaming state has been transferred;
The control means for recognition (of the main control device 71) sets the state of the means for recognition to a recognizable state where the management device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state where the recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing an advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set.
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the specific gaming state, a first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state (e.g., explicit high likelihood winning result A) And the transition mode when the non-explicit high probability hit result A is set in the high frequency support mode)
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The game machine is characterized by comprising setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) to set the recognizable state at the timing.

  In the gaming machine of feature C22, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition means becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed well in a gaming hall where a large number of gaming machines are installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a transition mode of the game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific gaming state. Thereby, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the gaming state transition mode. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the management device recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, it may be set to a recognizable state if there is a possibility that the effect of setting multiple types of gaming state transitions may be lost. Can be restricted.

  Note that a configuration newly limited in any one of the features C5 to C21 may be applied to the feature C22. In this case, there is a synergistic effect by applying these configurations.

Feature C23. A transition determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The game state is shifted to the specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) based on the determination result (each jackpot result and special loss result) corresponding to the determination result of the transition determination means being shifted to the game state. State transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S504 to S511 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71);
A recognition means (external terminal board 81) used to make the specific device (hall computer HC) recognize that the game state transition has been performed;
Recognition control means (of the main control device 71) for setting the state of the recognition means to a recognizable state in which the specific device can recognize that the game state transition has been performed or a non-recognizable state in which recognition is impossible. A function of executing the processing of step S511, step S512, step S516, step S905, and step S915 in the MPU 92);
With
As a gaming state to be transferred after the specific gaming state, a case where a specific element (support mode) for changing an advantage degree is relatively advantageous and a case where it is disadvantageous are set.
As a transition state of the gaming state including transition to the specific gaming state, a first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific gaming state (e.g., explicit high likelihood winning result A) And the transition mode when the non-explicit high probability hit result A is set in the high frequency support mode)
When the transition state of the gaming state is the first transition mode, the recognition control means is after the timing in the middle of the specific gaming state and before the transition to the gaming state after the specific gaming state is performed. The game machine is characterized by comprising setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S511 and S512 in the MPU 92 of the main control device 71) to set the recognizable state at the timing.

  In the gaming machine having the feature C23, when the gaming state transition occurs, the recognition unit becomes in a recognizable state, so that the gaming machine can be managed satisfactorily. In addition, as a transition mode of the game state, the first transition mode in which the specific element is advantageous after the specific game state is set, so that the degree of attention to the game is increased.

  In this case, when the game state transition mode is the first transition mode, the setting timing is delayed rather than being set to the recognizable state from the start timing of the specific gaming state. Thereby, when the transition mode of the gaming state becomes the first transition mode, the recognizable state is flexibly set according to the progress status, and the first transition mode is set as the gaming state transition mode. With this configuration, it is possible to perform gaming machine management satisfactorily.

  In addition, for example, if the specific device recognizes that the gaming state has shifted, it may be set to the recognizable state when there is a risk that the effects of setting multiple types of gaming state transitions may be lost. Can be restricted.

  Note that a configuration newly limited in any one of the features C5 to C21 may be applied to the feature C23. In this case, there is a synergistic effect by applying these configurations.

  The invention according to the feature B group or the feature C group is effective for the following problems.

  For example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine performs a lottery based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition has been established, and if the lottery result is a predetermined result, a game state transition such as a transition to a jackpot state is performed. appear. In addition, in order to be able to perform gaming machine management in a gaming hall, a configuration is known in which information for causing a gaming machine to recognize its own gaming state is output to a gaming hall management computer or the like.

  For example, when the gaming machine outputs a signal indicating that it is in a big hit state, the management computer can recognize that the gaming machine is in the big hit state. Then, when an illegal act that pays out a large amount of game media is performed, the game hall indicates that a large amount of game media is paid out even though a signal indicating that the jackpot is not made. It is possible for the administrator to recognize this, and it is possible to prevent the cheating from being continued for a long period of time.

  In addition, for example, there is a known game hall in which counter displays are arranged in parallel for each gaming machine, and the number of transitions such as a jackpot state is displayed in a counter in accordance with the signal output from the gaming machine. It is made to notify by a vessel. In this case, the player can select a gaming machine in which he / she plays with reference to the contents notified by the counter display.

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game. As one method, it is conceivable to improve the transition state of the gaming state. However, when trying to improve the transition state of the gaming state while using the conventional configuration as it is for the signal output to the game hall, at least one of the management of the gaming machine through the signal output and the improvement of the degree of attention to the game There are concerns that problems may arise.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 32a ... Large winning opening, 34 ... Lower operation opening, 41 ... Symbol display device, 51 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 71 ... Main control device, 72 ... Voice light emission control device, 77 ... Dispensing device constituting privilege granting means, 78 ... Dispensing control device constituting privilege granting means, 81 ... External terminal board as recognition means, 92 ... MPU, 102 ... MPU, 111 ... Display control device, 236 ... 1st 1 variable winning device, 236a... First grand prize opening, 237... Second variable winning equipment, 237a.

Claims (8)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state;
A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the variable pitch control is performed, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect are set to be high and low,
As the execution mode of at least a part of the section in the predetermined specific gaming state, the variable entry control is performed by the low expectation mode, and the variable is performed over a predetermined specific reference number. A predetermined mode is set that ends when the ball entering control is executed and also ends when a predetermined reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine, wherein the number of the specific reference number is set to be equal to or less than the number of the specific reference number. As the specific gaming state, the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed and the specific entry state cannot be identified or difficult to identify in terms of the operation of the variable entry means. The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state in which the low identification section is set are set,
The second specific gaming state is set so as to include a section executed according to the predetermined mode in the low identification section,
In the first specific gaming state, the number of sections executed by the predetermined mode included in the low identification section is not included in the low identification section or does not include the section executed by the predetermined mode. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is set to be larger than that in the second specific gaming state. As the specific gaming state, the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode is performed and the specific entry state cannot be identified or difficult to identify in terms of the operation of the variable entry means. The first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state in which the low identification section is set are set,
In the second specific game state, when the variable pitch control is executed for the specific reference number of times, the low discrimination section is ended, and the specific reference number of game balls are stored in the variable pitch means. It is set to an execution mode in which the low discrimination section ends even when entering the opening,
The first specific game state is set to an execution mode in which the low identification section does not end even if the specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable ball entry means. Item 1. A gaming machine according to Item 1. The maximum number of times that the variable pitch control is executed in the low identification section is set to the specific reference number in both the first specific game state and the second specific game state,
Furthermore, the first specific game state is configured to have a round game that is controlled to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches an upper limit number, and the round The game is set to an execution mode that is terminated based on a predetermined upper limit number of times, and is set to an execution mode that includes a plurality of round games in the low identification section. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein   The said 1st specific game state is set so that one said variable pitch control may be performed in the said one round game in the said low identification area. Gaming machine. Notification that controls the notification means so that the predetermined notification is performed when the section performed in the predetermined mode ends when the specific reference number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitching means. Comprising control means,
The notification control means is configured such that the number of game balls entering the opening of the variable pitching means is the specific reference number in the opening of the variable pitching means related to the variable pitch control for the specific reference number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, further comprising a restriction unit that restricts execution of the predetermined notification when it has been reached. A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state;
A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the variable pitch control is performed, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
As the specific gaming state,
The game is configured to have a round game that is controlled so as to be terminated when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means reaches the upper limit number when the variable ball entry control is performed. A first specific gaming state that is terminated when the game is executed for a predetermined upper limit number of times;
When the variable pitch control is executed for a predetermined specific number of times, the process ends and when a predetermined specific number of game balls enter the opening of the variable pitch means. A second specific gaming state that also ends,
Is set,
As a unit mode when the variable pitch control is performed once by the variable pitch control means, the expectation degree of the game ball entering the variable pitch means when the variable pitch control is in the open state is relatively The high expectation aspect and the low expectation aspect are set to be high and low,
The first specific game state and the second specific game state are advanced by the variable entry control according to the low expectation mode, and the operation of the variable entry means indicates which specific game state is in progress. The low identification section that is indistinguishable or difficult to identify is set in the appearance of
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific reference number is set to a number smaller than the upper limit number. A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
Variable entry means provided in the game area, having an opening formed to a size that allows a game ball to enter, and configured to switch the opening between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
Transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state;
A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the variable pitch control is performed, based on the determination result of the transition determination means being a transition determination result corresponding to shifting the gaming state;
In gaming machines equipped with
As the specific game state, a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which a low identification section in which the specific game state is indistinguishable or difficult to identify in the appearance of the operation of the variable pitching means is set. Is set,
In the low identification section of one of the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is the target of the variable ball control and is in the open state. A game characterized by comprising special control execution means for executing special control corresponding to making it easier for the player to recognize that there is a high possibility that it is not in the other specific gaming state based on what has occurred Machine.

Images